F4 Users Guide

Series F4S/D
User’s Manual
96mm x 96mm Ramping Controller (1/4 DIN)

with Guided Setup and Programming
1241 Bundy Boulevard, Winona, Minnesota USA

Phone: +1 (507) 454-5300, Fax: +1 (507) 452-4507 http://www.watlow.com
Registered Company
Winona, Minnesota USA
0600-0032-0000 Rev G
*0600-0032-0000*
April 2004 $15.00
About Watlow Winona
Watlow Winona is a division of Watlow Electric Mfg. Co., St. Louis, Missouri, a manufacturer of industrial
electric heating products since 1922. Watlow begins with a full set of specifications and completes an indus-
trial product that is manufactured in-house, in the U.S.A. Watlow products include electric heaters, sensors,
controllers and switching devices. The Winona operation has been designing solid-state electronic control
devices since 1962, and has earned the reputation as an excellent supplier to original equipment manufac-
turers. These OEMs and end users depend upon Watlow Winona to provide compatibly engineered controls
that they can incorporate into their products with confidence. Watlow Winona resides in a 100,000-square-
foot marketing, engineering and manufacturing facility in Winona, Minnesota.
About This Manual

The Series F4 User’s Manual covers hardware and software in both the Single-
Channel and Dual-Channel controllers. Instructions and illustrations pertain
to both unless otherwise specified. If a given feature or parameter operates on 1 2
only the Single or the Dual Channel controller, it will be identified by an icon in Single Dual
Channel Channel
the margin or nearby. F4S F4D
Your Comments
Your comments or suggestions on this manual are welcome. Please send them to the Technical Literature ,
Watlow Winona, 1241 Bundy Boulevard, P.O. Box 5580, Winona, Minnesota, 55987-5580 U.S.; Telephone:
+1 (507) 454-5300; fax: +1 (507) 452-4507.
Copyright July 2002 by Watlow, Inc., with all rights reserved. (2249)
T
Series F4S/D: Table of Contents
Introduction Installation and Wiring

Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Chapter 11: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.1
Chapter 2: Keys, Displays and Navigation . . .2.1 Chapter 12: Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.1
Operations Appendix
Chapter 3: Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.2
CE Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . .A.5
Profiles Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.6
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.7
Chapter 4: Profile Programming . . . . . . . . . . .4.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.8
Setup List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.13
Software Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.16
Chapter 5: Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1
Chapter 6: Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1
Chapter 7: Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1
Factory
Chapter 8: Security and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1
Chapter 9: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
Chapter 10: Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
A downloadable electronic copy of this user manual is available free of charge through Watlow's web site:
http://www.watlow.com/prodtechinfo. Search on Series F4.
Watlow Series F4S/D Table of Contents ■ i

Safety Information in this Manual
ç Note, caution and warning symbols appear throughout this book to draw your attention to
important operational and safety information.
A “NOTE” marks a short message to alert you to an important detail.
A “CAUTION” safety alert appears with information that is important for protecting your
Safety Alert equipment and performance.
CAUTION or
A “WARNING” safety alert appears with information that is important for protecting you,
WARNING others and equipment from damage. Pay very close attention to all warnings that apply to
your application.
The ç symbol (an exclamation point in a triangle) precedes a general CAUTION or
∫ WARNING statement.
The Ó symbol (a lightning bolt in a lightning bolt in a triangle) precedes an electric shock
hazard CAUTION or WARNING safety statement.
Electrical Shock
Hazard Technical Assistance
If you encounter a problem with your Watlow controller, review all configuration
CAUTION or
information to verify that your selections are consistent with your application: inputs;
WARNING outputs; alarms; limits; etc. If the problem persists after checking the above, you can get
technical assistance by calling your local Watlow representative (see back cover of this
manual), or in the U.S., dial +1 (507) 494-5656. For technical support, ask for an
Applications Engineer.
Please have the following information available when you call:
• Complete model number • All configuration information
• User’s Manual • Diagnostic menu readings
Warranty
The Watlow Series F4 is warranted to be free of defects in material and workmanship for
36 months after delivery to the first purchaser for use, providing that the units have not
been misapplied. Since Watlow has no control over their use, and sometimes misuse, we
cannot guarantee against failure. Watlow's obligations hereunder, at Watlow's option, are
limited to replacement, repair or refund of purchase price, and parts which upon
examination prove to be defective within the warranty period specified. This warranty
does not apply to damage resulting from transportation, alteration, misuse or abuse.
Returns
• Call or fax your distributor or the nearest Watlow sales office for best information
about returns. (See outside back cover.)
• To return directly to Watlow Winona in the U.S., first call or fax Customer Service for
a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number (telephone: +1 (507) 454-5300; fax: +1
(507) 452-4507).
• Put the RMA number on the shipping label, along with on a written description of the
problem.
• A restocking charge of 20% of the net price is charged for all standard units returned
to stock. Returned units must be in like new condition and must be returned within
120 days of initial receipt of the product.
ii ■ Table of Contents Watlow Series F4S/D

1
Chapter One: Introduction
Overview
Watlow’s Series F4 1/4 DIN industrial ramping • 256 possible ramp steps in as many as 40 vari-
controllers are easy to set up, program and operate able-length, nameable profiles
in the most demanding ramp-and-soak-processing • six step types
applications. The F4 includes:
• eight programmable event outputs, compressor
• four-line, high resolution LCD display
control, boost heat/boost cool, power-out selec-
• guided setup and programming software tions and a real-time clock.
• 16-bit microprocessor • Note: the F4S has two less analog inputs and
two less control outputs than the F4D.
Inputs and Outputs
1 Universal F4
1 Analog Input
(2 optional)
1A
1B
2 Control Outputs
Single
Channel
…Alarm1 Lo Deviation
–1 F
1 2 Alarm Outputs
F4S Adjusts Value 2
4 Digital Inputs Back Next

2 Retransmit Outputs
(optional)
1 Communication I/O
i 8 Digital Outputs
Figure 1.1a — Single-Channel Series F4 (F4S_ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ ) Inputs and Outputs.
F4
2 3 Universal
Analog Inputs
1A
1B
2A 4 Control Outputs
Dual 2B
…Alarm2 Low SP_______

Channel 32 F
1
2 Alarm Outputs
F4D Adjusts Value 2
Back Next
4 Digital Inputs
2 Retransmit Outputs
(optional)
1 Communication I/O
i 8 Digital Outputs
Figure 1.1b — Dual-Channel Series F4 (F4D_ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ ) Inputs and Outputs.
Watlow Series F4S/D Introduction ■ 1.1

Sample Application: Environmental Testing
with a Dual Channel F4 Using Multiple Inputs and Outputs
Overview
Andy, an engineer with the Ajax
Testing Company, is running tempera-
ture and humidity tests on navigation-
al equipment. He wants to be able to
control temperature and humidity in
the environmental chamber, and moni-
tor the temperature of the equipment
itself. With the Watlow Series F4 ramp-
ing controller, he can:
• program the test as a ramping profile 1. Wire

and control it remotely;
• use boost heat and cool to maintain Following diagrams in the user manual, Andy
precise temperatures; connected the analog input terminals to temper-
• record the equipment temperature on ature and humidity sensors, channel 1 output
a chart recorder; terminals to the heater and cooler, channel 2
• notify the operator with a bell if pro- outputs to the humidifier/dehumidifier, alarm
cess temperatures do not follow the output 1 to an alarm bell and retransmit output
profile; 1 to a chart recorder to track the equipment
• pause the profile if someone opens the temperature. Digital output 6 and 7 controlled
chamber door during the test; the boost heater and cooler, and 8 controlled the
• set up communications with a PC mechanical refrigeration compressor.
later.
See the Wiring Chapter.
1A
1B
2A
2B
F4 5. Run the Profile
Main Page___________ 1
Go to Profiles
Go to Setup 2
Go to Factory
Andy pressed the Profile Key and

i
selected the test profile. He monitored

the progress of the test on the display
and the equipment temperature on the
chart recorder.
See the Operations Chapter.
Figure 1.2 — Sample Application 1: Series F4 Dual Channel Using Multiple Inputs and Outputs.
1.2 ■ Introduction Watlow Series F4S/D

Main Page___________ Choose to Setup:____
Go to Profiles Digital Output8
Go to Setup Communications
Go to Factory Custom Main Page
2. Set up the F4 3. Customize and Name

Andy customized the Main Page so he could
After checking the navigation instructions
tell the status of the digital outputs by glanc-
in the user manual, Andy went to the
ing at the controller's Lower Display (Setup
Setup Page of the software to configure the
Page > Custom Main Page Menu).
controller for the equipment and the ramp-
ing profiles. He named the alarm to make
He also named one of the Alarms "TEMP
it easier to identify an alarm condition. The
DEV", which will make it easy to identify the
alarm message will appear on the Lower
alarm condition (Setup Page > Alarm Output
Display, which also informs about the
1 Menu). Three digital inputs, two alarms
progress of the test.
and eight digital outputs can be given 10-
character names.
See the Keys, Displays and Navigation Chapter.
See the Setup Chapter.
See the Setup Chapter.
4. Program the Profile

F4
1A
1B
2A
Andy programmed the test as a ramping pro-
2B file of 21 steps. To make sure the equipment
Main Page___________ Step 1: Ramp Time
Go to Profiles
1
is at the ambient chamber temperature, he
Go to Setup 2
Step 2: Ramp Time
Go to Factory
put a Wait condition on Step 2. Step 20 is a
Step 3: Soak
Jump step that puts the equipment through
Step 4: Jump
the same heat and humidity cycle 21 times.
i
See the Profile Programming Chapter.
✔ NOTE:
The profile in this sample application is embedded
in the Series F4 software for use as a teaching tool
or a template. It is the first profile, MILSTD810D,
located in the Profiles Page > Edit Profile Menu.
You can change or delete this profile and later
recall it through factory defaults. If you have a
single-channel controller, you will see only the tem-
perature on Channel 1. This is not the true
Military Standard Test 810D.
This sample application is continued in the Operations, Profile Programming and Setup Chapters.
Watlow Series F4S/D Introduction ■ 1.3

Setup Steps
• If the Series F4 is an independent unit, start • If the Series F4 is already installed in a piece
with Step 1 below. of equipment and the setup and profile pro-
• If the Series F4 is already installed in and set gramming functions are locked, proceed direct-
up for a piece of equipment, proceed to Steps 4, ly to Step 5 or 7.
5, 6 and 7 below.
What to do How to do it
1 Install the controller. See Chapter 11, Installation. (This step will not
be necessary if the Series F4 is already installed
in equipment.)
2 Wire the controller. See Chapter 12, Wiring. (This step will not be
necessary if the Series F4 is already installed in
equipment.)
3 Set up the controller to suit your basic

application.
Learn to navigate the software in Chapter 2,
Keys, Displays and Navigation, and then go to
Chapter 5, Setup. For background, you may also
want to refer to Chapter 6, Features. (This step
may not be necessary if the Series F4 is already
installed in the equipment.)
4 Tune the system and set alarm set points. See Chapter 3, Operations.
5 Set up serial communications. See Chapter 7, Communications.
6 Program a profile. See Chapter 4, Profile Programming.
7 Run the profile (or establish a set point

for static set point control).
See Chapter 3, Operations.
The ˆ Key
During all these steps, the Information Key
will summon helpful definitions and setup tips.
Just position the cursor next to the item you
want to know more about, then press the key.
Press it again to return to your task.
1.4 ■ Introduction Watlow Series F4S/D

2
Chapter Two: Keys, Displays &
Navigation
Displays and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2
Custom Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3
Keys and Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4
Guided Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5
How to Enter Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6
ˆ Information Key Answers Your Questions . . . . .2.7
Main Page Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.8
Overview
This chapter introduces the user interface of the The Information Key summons information about
Series F4S/D controller — the displays, keys and the pages, menus, parameters and values, as well
indicator lights, and the principles of navigating as error and alarm conditions if they occur.
the software to program profiles and change setup The software is organized into five pages of menus.
settings. The Series F4 is designed with user- The Main Page gives access to the other four —
friendly features to facilitate setup, programming Operations, Profiles, Setup and Factory. The Main
and operation of the Series F4. Page can be customized to display user-chosen
The four-line LCD display facilitates setup and information.
programming, and presents informative messages
about status, error and alarm conditions.
Digital inputs, digital outputs, profiles and alarms
can be named for easy reference.
Watlow Series F4S/D Keys, Displays and Navigation ■ 2.1

Displays and Indicator Lights
Upper Display
Displays Channel 1 actual
process values during Active Output Indicator
operation. Displays error Lights (Output status):
information if errors occur. Lit when the corresponding
controller channel output is
Lower Display active. (F4D shown)
Displays information about the setup,
operation and programming of the
controller. F4
1A
Alarm Output Indicator
1B Lights
(Alarm status):
Cursor 2A Lit during an alarm state.
(>):
Indicates selected parameter 2B
or present value in F4 mem-
Main Page___________
ory. Moves via the four navi- 1
Go to Profiles Communications Indicator
gation keys.
Go to Setup 2
Light
Go to Factory (Communication status):
Lit (pulsates) when the con-
troller sends or receives valid
Profile Indicator Light
data.
(Run/Hold status):
• Lit when a ramping profile
runs. Scroll Bar
• When blinking, the profile is (Scroll up or down):
on hold. i Appears when the Up or
• When not lit, the controller Down Keys can reveal more
operates as a static set information in the Lower
point controller. Display.
Figure 2.2 — Series F4S/D Displays and Indicator Lights. (F4D shown)
2.2 ■ Keys, Displays and Navigation Watlow Series F4S/D

Custom Main Page
The first and central page on the Lower Display is sen information. (To do so, go to the Setup Page,
the Main Page, which shows error messages, input, Custom Main Page Menu. See Chapter 5, Setup,
output and profile status, and allows access to con- for instructions.)
troller software (Go to Operations, Profiles, Setup The following parameters will appear by default on
and Factory). the Main Page, unless the Main Page has been cus-
The Main Page can be customized to display cho- tomized.
Main Page_____
Will always appear Input 1 Error Press < to scroll
if active: Input 2 Error down the list.
Input 3 Error
Will appear if active Alarm 1 Condition

and if set up to appear: Alarm 2 Condition
Read-only information
Will appear if active and Autotuning Ch 1

selected to appear: Autotuning Ch 2
Will appear by default: Current File

(Profile information will Current Step
Input2
appear by default if a
Set Point 1 Static set point control
profile is running.) Set Point 2
Step Type
Target SP1
Target SP2
Wait for Status
Time Remaining
Will always appear Digital Ins Read-only information
unless customized: Digital Outs
% Power1
% Power2
Date
Time
>Go to Operations
Go to Profiles Access to software
Go to Setup
Go to Factory
2
Dual
Channel
Figure 2.3 — Default Main Page Parameters. F4D

Keys and Navigation
Setup Page
Main>Setup
Choose to Setup
System
Think of this display as a window Analog Input 1
into the software table. You move
around in the software using the
F4
1A
following navigation keys:
1B
> Move Up/Increase 2A
, . < Move Down/Decrease 2B

Back Next
Main Page___________ 1
Go to Profiles Up and Down Keys
Go to Setup 2 (Move Up/Increase and Move
Go to Factory Down/Decrease):
Move the cursor (>) position in the
Profile Key Lower Display through the
(Profile Run/Hold): software in the direction of the key
Summons a menu that allows arrow. Increase or decrease a
you to start, hold, resume or value, or change a letter in a user-
terminate a profile. nameable field, such as alarms,
events and profile names.
i
Left and Right Keys
(Back Out and Next):
4-20mA Move right to select the choice to
0-20mA the right of the cursor and proceed
Information Key 0-10V to the next screen. Move left to exit.
(Toggle for more 0-5V
information): 1-5V
Provides information in the 0-50mV
Lower Display about the
Choose Units
cursor-selected parameter.
Another press toggles the Temperatur 2500 ft
display back to the parameter. %rh
PSI
units
Choose Decimal
0
0.0
0.00
0.000
Figure 2.4 — Series F4 Keys and Navigation.

Guided Setup Main Page___________ .
Go to Operations
Go to Profiles
In most F4 menus, setup and programming tasks
>Go to Setup
are guided. For example, once you select Analog
Input 1 on the Setup Page, all parameters neces-
sary to configure that input are linked: Choose to Setup:____ .
1. Use > < to move the cursor to select an >Control Output 1A▲
item in a list. Control Output 1B■
Control Output 2A▼
2. Press the Right Key ..
3. Enter the value and make a choice.
4. Press . again. Choose Function:____ .
>Heat
5. Repeat until you return to the original list. Cool
. saves the value and proceeds to the next
parameter in the series.
, saves the value and backs out of the series, and Choose Cycle Time:__ .
returns to the Main Page. >Variable Burst
For initial setup and programming, we recommend Fixed Time ■
that you answer all the questions in the series, ▼
entering values for all linked parameters and
pressing . until you return to your starting
point.
Enter Hi Power Limit .
100%
To edit a parameter, proceed through the series ▲▼ Adjusts Value
without changing values until you find the parame- < Back > Next
ter you want to change. After making the change,
you may back out or proceed to the end of the
series. Enter Lo Power Limit .
0%
▲▼ Adjusts Value
✔ NOTE:
< Back > Next
The Edit PID Menu (Operations Page) presents lists of
parameters that can be entered and edited individually.
Press either . or , to enter the value and return to Choose to Setup:____ ,
the list. >Control Output 1A▲
Control Output 1B■
✔ NOTE: Control Output 2A▼
Make sure your setup is complete before entering profiles.
Certain analog input setup changes will delete profiles.
Save setup changes
or restore values?
▼ Restore ▲ Save

How to Enter Numbers and Names
Many parameters require users to enter a numeri- nized names, such as TOO HOT for an alarm,
cal value. Alarms, digital inputs, digital outputs DOOR OPEN for a digital input and GLAZE 6 for
and profiles can be customized with easily recog- a profile.
F4
1A
1B
Numbers 2A
1. Navigate Alarm Hysteresis:___

2B
to the parameter
36 °F 1
you want to Adjusts Value 2

change. Save Changes
4. Press . to enter
You'll change the value.
the value on
Z If the cursor
this line. 3. Scroll to increase or
is at Z, press decrease the value of
Y the digit.
< to go i
X down to A,
W
then from 9
to 0. Blank is
… on the end.
C
2. Move right or left, if necessary, to choose the digit to change.
(Some numbers increase or decrease as single units; others
B digit by digit.) The active position is underlined.
A
9
F4
8 1A
7 1B
6 Names 2A
5
1. Navigate Enter Alarm Name:___
2B
4. Press . to move to the
4 1 end of the 10-character name
to the parameter ALARM1
Adjusts Char space and proceed to the
3 you want to 2
Back Next next screen. This enters the
name.
2 name.
1 You'll change
each letter on
Ø this nameable 3. Scroll to choose the new
10-character letter or a number.
Blank
line. i
2. Move right or left to choose the character to change.

(The position is underlined.)
Figure 2.6 — How to Enter Numbers and Names. (F4D shown)

ˆ Information Key Answers Your Questions
There’s a wealth of information about features and 2. Press the ˆ key. The displayed information will
parameters right in the Series F4 controller. Use assist you during setup and operation. When
the Information Key to get this information. information takes more than four lines, the
1. Use the four navigation keys (< > , . ) scroll bar will be filled or weighted at the end,
to position the cursor (>) next to the parameter directing you to press < or > to see the rest.
you want to know more about. 3. Press ˆ again to return to your task.
Toggle the Information Key F4

ˆ between the parameter 1A
you need to know about and 1B
its functional definition. 2A
2B
Choose to Setup:____
The second press takes you System 1
Analog Input 1
back to where you were. Analog Input 2 2
The scroll bar indicates

more information above or
below; use the > and <
keys. i
Figure 2.7 — The Information Key. (F4D shown)

Main Page Parameter Table Modbus
Register
Range read/write Conditions for
Parameter Description (Modbus Value) Default [I/O, Set, Ch] Parameters to Appear
Main Page
Main > Setup > Main Page
Input x (1 to 3) Error
Alarm x (1 to 2) Condition
Autotuning Channel x (1 or 2)
Parameter x (1 to 16) None Current File
View customized Input 1 Value Current Step
parameter list. Input 2 Value Input 2 value
Input 3 Value Set Point 1
Set Point 1 Set Point 2
Set Point 2 Step Type
% Power 1 Target SP1
% Power 2 Target SP2
Tune status 1 Wait for
Tune status 2 Status
Time Time
Date Remaining
Digital Ins Digital Ins
Digital Outs Digital Outs*
*Digital outputs configured as
Time Remaining % Power 1
Current File % Power 2 events can be turned on/off in the
Current Step Date static set point mode or when a
Active Ch1 PID Set Time running profile is on hold. The
Active Ch2 PID Set
event output status will remain as
Last Jump Step
Jump Count set until reset by the profile or by
WaitFor Status the operator.
Step Type
Target SP1
Target SP2
Inner Set Point
Custom Message 1
Custom Message 2
Custom Message 3
Custom Message 4
Input 1 Cal. Offset
Input 2 Cal. Offset
Input 3 Cal. Offset
Go to Operations
Auto-tune PID sets,
edit PID parameters
and select alarm set
points.
Go to Profiles
Create, edit, delete
and rename profiles.
Go to Setup
Set up inputs and
outputs, configure
the system and
design the Main
Page.
Go to Factory
Set security settings,
and calibrate and re-
store factory settings.

3
Chapter Three: Operations
Static Set Point Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
Profile Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2
Alarm Set Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4
Clearing Alarms and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4
Auto-tune PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4
Edit PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4
Multiple PID Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5
Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6
Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7
Troubleshooting Alarms and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8
Operations Page Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
Operations Page Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.11
Operations Page Parameter Record . . . . . . . . . . . .3.15
Series F4S/D Operation

The Series F4S/D controller can function as either • The Lower Display shows the default or user-
a static set point controller or as a profile con- configured information set. See the Setup
troller. The information shown on the Lower Dis- Chapter for instructions in programming the
play during operation (the Main Page) is pro- Main Page to display the information you want.
grammable and can be customized to support both To operate the Series F4 as a static set point con-
modes of operation. (See Setup Page.) troller, use the navigation keys (> < , . ) to
In either the static set point mode or the profile select the preferred channel and adjust the set
mode, the Series F4 can only be operated in a point.
closed-loop configuration. Manual operation (open-
loop) mode is not allowed. Static Set Point1___
___ °F
Static Set Point Control < Back > Next
The Series F4 is in static mode when it is not con-
trolling a ramping profile. When in static mode: Limits may be placed on the set point in the Set
Point Low Limit and Set Point High Limit parame-
• The Profile Indicator Light is off. ters (Setup Page > Analog Inputx).
• The Upper Display shows the actual process Setting the set point to Set Point Low Limit minus
temperature of input 1, 2 or 3 depending upon 1 (-1) will turn control Output 1 off and display the
Setup Page configuration. set point as off.
✔ NOTE:
All control activity stops when you enter the Setup Page,
Static Set Point1___
OFF
Analog Input, Digital Input, Control Output, Alarm Out-
put, Retransmit, and Digital Output menus.
< Back > Next
Watlow Series F4S/D Operations ■ 3.1

Profile Control π
The main purpose of the Series F4 is to control pro- ■
Start a Profile?
■
>
files for ramp-and-soak-processing applications.
The instructions below explain how to use an exist- ▼ No ▲ Yes ■
ing profile. To program a profile, see Chapter 4, ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Profile Programming.
To Start/Run a Profile Start Profile:_______ .

To initiate the profile mode, press the Profile Key MILSTD810D..........
π and answer the questions that follow. ALUMINUM
While running a profile, the Profile Status message >Glaze 8
on the lower display will keep you informed about
the progress of the profile. For example, it could
read like the screen at right: Start:_______________ .
Step 1 Autostart
>Step 2 Ramp Time
✔ NOTE: Step 3 Ramp Time
As a protective measure, all stored profiles will be cleared
if you enter the Setup Page and change values in the
Analog Input 1, 2, 3 menus —specifically, the Sensor, Glaze 8 Running.
Sensor Type, Decimal, Scale (for process inputs), and Set Step 2
Point High and Low Limits. Pop-up messages will warn Remain 00:10:30
that the profiles will be erased from the controller’s mem-
ory.
✔ NOTE:
✔ NOTE: While a profile is running, the controller will not recog-
You must configure the software for your inputs and out- nize digital inputs that are programmed to start a profile.
puts before programming a profile. See the Setup Chap- Such digital inputs will be recognized only while the con-
ter. troller is in the static set point mode.
✔ NOTE: ✔ NOTE:
You must program a profile or use the pre-programmed While a profile is running, profiles can be either created
MILSTD810D profile before running it. See the Profile or renamed only while a profile is running. All other
Programming Chapter. pages and menus can be entered only during Static Set
Point Control mode.
ç WARNING
Check the configuration of the controller on the Setup
Page before starting and running a profile (if the Setup
Page is not locked). Make sure the settings are appropri-
ate to the profile: input sensor ranges and limits, digital
inputs and outputs as events, guaranteed soak band, re-
sponse to power out and Celsius or Fahrenheit scales. If
the Setup Page is accessible, failure to check the configu-
ration before running a profile could result in damage to
equipment and/or property, and/or injury or death to per-
sonnel.
3.2 ■ Operations Watlow Series F4S/D

To Hold a Running Profile
1. Press the Profile Key π while running a pro- Hold Profile:_______
file. The Profile Action Menu appears. Don’t Hold
>Hold
2. Choose to Don’t Hold, Hold or Terminate Terminate
the profile. (Default is to Don’t Hold.) If you
choose to hold the profile, the Main Page reap-
pears, and the Profile Status message reads
“Profile X holding.” The Profile Indicator Light is
off. ✔ NOTE:
If you do not make a choice when the Profile Action While profiles are on hold, the step set point value can be
Menu appears, the profile continues running and adjusted using the Static Set Point parameter on the
the profile indicator light stays on. Main Page.
To Resume a Profile on Hold Resume Profile:_____

1. Press the Profile Key π while a profile is >Continue Holding
holding. The Resume Profile Menu appears. Resume
Terminate
2. Choose to Continue Holding, Resume or
Terminate the profile.
If you do not make a choice, the profile continues ✔ NOTE:
holding and the Profile Indicator Light stays off. When a profile is resumed during a Ramp step, the con-
troller uses the Static Set Point from the Main Page to
calculate the rate of change needed to get to the set point
at the end of the step. When a profile is resumed in a
soak step, the new set point value will be used as the soak
value for the time remaining in the step.
To Terminate a Running/Holding Profile Hold Profile:_______

1. Press the Profile Key π while a profile is Don’t Hold
running. The Profile Action Menu appears. Hold
>Terminate
2. Choose to Continue, Hold or Terminate the
profile. (Default is to Continue.) If you choose to
terminate, the profile ends with all outputs off. ✔ NOTE:
The set point on the Main Page reads off.
The Profile Status message takes precedence over all oth-
If you do not make a choice when the Profile Action er information except errors, alarm messages and input
Menu appears, the profile continues as it was — status. Errors and alarm messages always take prece-
running or holding. dence over Profile Status.
π The Profile Key:

• initiates the ramping profile mode; The Profile Key functions only from the Main
• initiates the Hold-profile state; Page. It will not function from any of the other
pages — Operations, Profile, Setup or Factory.
• initiates the Resume-profile command;
• initiates the Terminate-profile command.

✔ NOTE:
Alarm Set Points PID Set 1 for Channel 1 and PID Set 6 for Channel 2
are used in the Static Set Point mode.
The Series F4 includes two alarm outputs, which
can be programmed as process or deviation alarms. Autotuning Procedure
Process alarms notify the operator when process Autotuning cannot be initiated while a profile is
values exceed or fall below Alarm Low and Alarm running. It can only be initiated in the static set
High Set Points. Deviation alarms notify the opera- point control mode.
tor when the process has deviated from the set
1. Before initiating auto-tune, go to the System
point beyond the deviation limits. For more infor-
Menu (Setup Page), and set the Channel 1 or 2
mation, see the Features Chapter. To set up the
Autotune Set Point to the percentage of set point
alarms, see the Setup Chapter.
you choose to begin with. This percentage is
Alarm set points are the points at which alarms based on your knowledge of the system and how
switch on or off, depending on the alarm setting. much overshoot or undershoot there is likely to
Alarm set points can be viewed or changed in the be in on-off control.
Alarm Set Point Menus (Operations Page).
In the Custom Main Page, select to display Tune
The Alarm High Set Point defines the high tem- Status 1 and Tune Status 2. This displays Tune
perature that, if exceeded, will trigger an alarm. Status in the Main Page.
This temperature must be higher than the alarm
low set point and lower than the high limit of the 2. Go to the Main Page and set the static set point.
sensor range.
3. Go to the Autotune PID Menu (Operations Page)
The Alarm Low Set Point defines the low tem- and choose the channel to auto-tune and the PID
perature that, if exceeded, will trigger an alarm. set in which to store the settings. A message will
This temperature must be lower than the alarm be displayed on the Main Page during the auto-
high set point and higher than the low limit of the tuning process. (Auto-tune cannot be initiated
sensor range. when a profile is running. It can only be initiated
✔ TIP: in the static set point mode.)
You may want to set up the alarms with names that will
4. When autotuning is complete, the controller will
identify the alarm conditions. See the Setup Page.
store the values for optimum control in the PID
set specified.
To Clear an Alarm or Error ✔ NOTE:
In an alarm condition, an alarm message will ap- While the controller is autotuning, profiles cannot be run
pear on the Main Page (if this option has been se- and only the Profiles Page and Operation Page of the
lected on the Setup Page). To silence it, move the software can be entered.
cursor to the alarm message and press the Right
Key . . A pop-up message will confirm the silenc-
ing of the alarm, and the indicator light will go off.
ç
CAUTION: Choose an auto-tune set point value that will
When the condition causing the error or alarm is protect your product from possible damage from overshoot
corrected, return to the error or alarm message on or undershoot during the autotuning oscillations. If the
the Main Page, and press the Right Key again. A product is sensitive, select the auto-tune set point very
pop-up message confirms the alarm is unlatched. carefully to prevent product damage.
For additional information about autotuning and proportion-
Auto-tune PID al, integral and derivative control, see the Features Chapter.
In autotuning, the controller automatically selects

the PID parameters for optimal control, based on
the thermal response of the system. In the Series
Edit PID
F4, five sets of PID values are available for each Edit PID is useful when Auto-tune PID does not
channel of the controller: sets 1 to 5 for channel 1, provide adequate control. Each of the PID parame-
and sets 6 to 10 for channel 2. Default PID values ters can be adjusted manually:
exist for all PID sets, although these values typi- Proportional Band: Define a band for PID con-
cally do not provide optimal control. PID values trol, entered in degrees or units. Lower values in-
can be auto-tuned or adjusted manually. When au- crease gain, which reduces droop but can cause os-
totuning is complete, the PID values will be stored cillation. Increase the proportional band to elimi-
in the Edit PID Menu. nate oscillation.

Integral (Reset): Define the integral time in min- new set point without overshooting or approach-
utes per repeat; define reset in repeats per minute. ing the set point too slowly.
Set repeats per minute if units are U.S.; minutes For additional information about manual tuning
per repeat if units are SI. and proportional, integral and derivative control,
Derivative (Rate): Define the derivative (rate) see the Features Chapter.
time in minutes. Large values prevent overshoot
but can cause sluggishness. Decrease if necessary.
Dead Band: Define the dead band in degrees or
units. Heating dead band shifts the set point down.
Multiple PID Sets
Cooling dead band shifts the set point up. For more Environmental chambers, ovens and furnaces typi-
information, see the Features Chapter. cally have different thermal requirements when
they operate at high and low temperatures or pres-
Manual Tuning Procedure sures. To accommodate varying thermal require-
ments, the F4 is capable of storing five different
1. Apply power to the Series F4 and enter a set PID sets for each channel. One set for each channel
point. Go to the Operations Page, Edit PID Menu can be chosen in each profile step.
and begin with Proportional Band set to 5; Inte-
For example, a controller in an environmental
gral (Reset) set to 0; Derivative (Rate) set to 0;
chamber with PID settings optimized for control at
and Autotune set to Tune Off.
subzero temperatures may not control well when
2. Start manual tuning by entering the desired set the set point is set to temperatures above the boil-
point and let the system stabilize. Once the sys- ing point of water. With the F4, one PID set could
tem stabilizes, observe the value of Input 1 on be used for subzero operation and another set for
the Main Page. If the Input 1 value fluctuates, temperatures above boiling.
increase the proportional band setting until it
stabilizes. Adjust the proportional band in 5º to Multiple Tuning Procedure
10º increments, allowing time between adjust-
ments for the system to stabilize. 1. To auto-tune a single PID set, begin by setting
the static set point on the Main Page.
3. Once Input 1 has stabilized, observe the percent
power on the Main Page. It should be stable, 2. Go to the Autotune PID Menu (Operations Page),
±2%. At this point, the process temperature and choose a channel and a set. Autotuning be-
should also be stable, but it will exhibit droop gins when you select the set. The Main Page dis-
(stabilized below set point). The droop can be plays information about the autotuning process
eliminated with reset or integral. when Tune Status is selected in the Custom
Main Page.
4. Start with a reset setting of 0.01, and allow 10 3. When autotuning is finished, proceed with
minutes for the process temperature to come up another PID set.
to set point. If it has not, increase the setting to
0.05 and wait another 10 minutes. After this, In the example above, the user would first auto-
double the reset setting and wait another 10 tune a PID set for subzero operation, and then an-
minutes until the process value equals the set other for operation at boiling temperatures. When
point. If the process becomes unstable, the reset programming a profile, the user could then select a
value is too large. Decrease the setting until the different PID set for each step, depending on the
process stabilizes. thermal requirements.
5. Increase Derivative/Rate to 0.10 minute. Then

✔ NOTE:
raise the set point by 20° to 30°F, or 11° to 17°C.
Observe the system's approach to the set point. If Autotuning cannot be done while running a profile. It can
the load process value overshoots the set point, only be initiated when the controller is in the Static Set
increase Derivative/Rate to 0.50 minute. Point Control mode.
Raise the set point by 20° to 30°F, or 11° to 17°C

and watch the approach to the new set point. If
you increase Derivative/Rate too much, the ap-
proach to the set point will be very sluggish. Re-
peat as necessary until the system rises to the

Cascade Cascade Autotuning Procedure
1. Go to Setup Page, Custom Main Page Menu.
Cascade control is available on the Series F4 con- Choose Tune Status 1 and Tune Status 2 to ap-
trollers. For background information about cascade pear as 2 of the 16 parameters that can be dis-
control, see the Features Chapter. played on the Main Page. The Main Page will now
Select cascade control through the Analog Input 3 display the status of the autotuning process.
Menu (Setup Page) and choose Process Cascade or 2. Autotune the inner loop. Go to the Autotune PID
Deviation Cascade. To set the range for the Process Menu (Operations Page), and select Cascade In-
Cascade Inner Loop set point, use Low and High ner-loop. Choose Cascade Inner Loop PID Set 1 to
Range settings. These are independent of the Chan- 5, where PID values will be stored after autotun-
nel 1 set point. Deviation Cascade uses Deviation ing. Autotuning begins when you choose the PID
Low and High settings that are referenced to the set. While autotuning, the F4 controller will con-
Channel 1 set point. trol the energy source in an on-off mode to a tem-
Deviation Cascade is used in applications with large perature equal to the Cascade High Range setting
set point ranges or where limiting heating or cooling x Channel 1 Autotune Set Point. For best results,
equipment temperatures is required. use proportional control only on the inner loop.
When tuning a cascade system, the inner loop must 3. Next, autotune the outer loop. Go to the Auto-
be tuned first. The inner loop comprises outputs 1A tune PID Menu (Operations Page). Choose
and 1B and the Analog Input 1 sensor, which usually Cascade Outer Loop, then choose Outer Loop PID
measures the energy source temperature. The output set 1 to 5, where PID values will be stored after
device controls a power switching device, which in autotuning. Autotuning begins when you choose
turn switches the heating and cooling. The set point the PID set. While autotuning, the outer loop will
for the inner loop is generated by the outer loop. For be controlled in an on-off mode at a set point
Process Cascade, this will have a range between the equal to static set point x Ch 1 Autotune Set
Cascade Low Range and Cascade High Range. Point. In most cases, the autotuning feature will
tune for acceptable control. If not, manually tune
Cascade Setup Procedure the outer loop (step 4 below). Before manually
1. First, configure Analog Input 3, Cascade Low tuning, record the values generated by the auto-
Range and Cascade High Range. tuning feature.
Go to the Analog Input 3 Menu (Setup Page). 4. To manually tune the outer loop, go to the Edit
Choose Process or Deviation Cascade. Deviation PID Menu (Operations Page). Choose Cascade
Cascade references Channel 1 set point allowing a Outer Loop, then choose Outer Loop PID set 1 to
range above and below the current control set 5. Begin manual tuning by setting the Propor-
point. For Process Cascade control of a heat/cool or tional Band to 5, Integral (Reset) to 0, and Rate
cool only system, set the Cascade Low Range to a to 0. Establish the desired set point and let the
value slightly lower than the lowest temperature system stabilize. When the system stabilizes,
desired in the chamber. For heat-only systems, set watch the Inner Loop Set Point on the Main
the Cascade Low Range to a value slightly lower Page. If this value fluctuates, increase the pro-
than the ambient temperature; otherwise the heat portional band until it stabilizes. Adjust the pro-
output will never turn fully off. portional band in 3° to 5° increments, allowing
time for the system to stabilize between adjust-
For heat/cool or heat only systems , set the Cas-
ments.
cade High Range to a value slightly higher than
the highest temperature desired in the chamber. 5. When Input 1 has stabilized, watch the percent
For cool-only systems, set the Cascade High Range power on the Main Page. It should be stable,
to a value slightly higher than the ambient tem- ±2%. At this point, the process temperature
perature; otherwise the cooling will never fully should also be stable, but it will exhibit droop
turn off. (stabilized below set point). The droop can be
eliminated with Integral (reset).
2. Next, configure the controller to tune and display
data for the outer loop. To view Inner Loop Set 6. Start with an integral setting of 99.9 minutes,
Point in the upper display, go to the Setup Page, and allow 10 minutes for the process tempera-
Custom Main Page Menu, select the Inner Set ture to come up to set point. If it has not,
point as one of the parameters, P1 to P16, to be decrease the setting by half and wait another 10
displayed in the Main Page. minutes. Then halve the setting again and wait
another 10 minutes until the process value
To also view Analog Input 3 in the upper display,
equals the set point. If the process becomes
go to the Setup Page, Process Display Menu, and
unstable, the integral value is too small. Increase
choose Alternating. Under Set Display Time,
it until the process stabilizes.
choose a duration for the display of the Input 1 and
Input 3 variables.

Sample Application:
Environmental Testing, Running a Profile
RUN
Andy presses the Profile Key π , moves the cursor
Main Page___________
Go to Profiles
Go to Setup
Go to Factory
1A
1B
2A
2B
2
F4
to "MILSTD810D" on the Run Profile Menu, then

presses the Right Key .. He wants to begin at
i
Step 1, so he presses . to select that step. The

Profile Status Message (on the Lower Display)
now says: "MILSTD810D Running. Step 1 Re-
mains: XX:XX."
π
Start Profile:_______
>MILSTD810D..........
Andy, an engineer with the Ajax Testing Company, ALUMINUM
is running temperature and humidity tests on Glaze 8
navigational equipment. He runs the test profile,
Military Standard Test 810D, having already set
up the controller and programmed the profile. HOLD
In Step 4, the temperature in the chamber exceed- When the alarm occurred, Andy put the profile on
ed the Alarm 1 setting. This triggered the alarm, hold while he corrected the Alarm Set Points.
causing the indicator light on the front panel (next
to the bell-shaped icon) to light up and a message
π
to appear on the lower display: "TEMP DEV Hold Profile:_______
High." Don’t Hold
Because Alarm 1 was set up as a latching alarm >Hold
(Setup Page), Andy had to clear it manually. First Terminate
he corrected the alarm condition by widening the
gap between low and high deviation alarm set- MILSTD810D Holding. .
tings on the Operations Page. He then unlatched Step 1
the alarm by returning to the Main Page alarm Remains 00:01:40
line and pressing the Right Key . again.
If your Series F4 is a single-channel controller,
you will see only the temperature on Channel 1.
This is not the true Military Standard Test 810D. RESUME
After clearing the alarm, Andy entered the com-
✔ NOTE:
mand to resume the profile.
This profile is embedded in the Series F4 as a teaching
tool and a template. Go to the Edit Profile Menu (Pro- π
files Page) and look for MILSTD810D.
Resume Profile:______
Continue Holding
>Resume
Terminate

Troubleshooting Alarms and Errors
Indication Probable Cause(s) Corrective Action
Power
• Displays are dead. • Power to unit may be off. • Check switches, fuses, breakers, interlocks,
• Fuse may be blown. limits, connectors, etc. for energized condi-
• Breaker may be tripped. tions and proper connection.
• Safety Interlock door switch, etc., may be
activated.
• Separate system limit control may be
latched.
• Wiring may be open.
• Input power may be incorrect. • Measure power upstream for required level.
Check part number for input power required.
• Check wire size.
• Check for bad connections.
Communications
• Unit will not • Address parameter may be incorrectly set. • Check Communications Setup Menu and set
communicate. to correct address.
• Baud rate parameter may be incorrectly • Check Communications Setup Menu and set
set. to correct baud rate.
• Unit-to-unit daisy chain may be disconnect- • Look for a break in the daisy chain.
ed.
•Communications wiring may be reversed, • Verify correct connections and test wiring
short or open. paths.
• EIA-485 converter box may be incorrectly • Check converter box wiring and its documen-
wired. tation.
• Computer communications port may be in- • Reconfigure computer’s communications port
correctly set up. setup and verify that communications are
okay.
• Communications software setup or address • Check the communication card documentation
may be incorrect. for setable variables and operational testing.
• Protocol or parity may be wrong, should be • Restart communications software and check
8, n, 1. for settings agreement. Verify the communica-
• Application software not working properly. tions bus is active.
• May need termination and pull-up and pull- • Verify operation with Watlow communications
down resistors. tool.
Alarms
• Alarm won’t occur. • Alarm output may be off. • Configure output as an alarm.
• Alarm set points may be incorrect. • Check alarm set points.
• Alarm sides may be incorrect. • Check the alarm sides setting.
• Controller may be in diagnostics mode. • Check the alarm type setting.
• Alarm won’t clear. • Alarm may be latched. Move cursor to • Check the alarm logic for compatibility with
(To clear the alarm, cor- alarm message. Press .. system peripherals and annunciators.
rect the alarm condi- • Alarm set points may be incorrect. • Check the power limit setting.
tion. If the alarm is • Alarm hysteresis may be incorrect. • Check the operation mode.
latched, press . with • Input may be in error condition. • Check the alarm output function.
the cursor at the alarm • Check the °C and °F setting.
message on the Main • Check the calibration offset value. Set it to a
Page.) lower level.

Indication Probable Cause(s) Corrective Action
Input Errors
(Upper Display shows error code • Input is in error condition. • Check sensor connections.
for input 1 only. Lower Display
shows error message. Alarm
Output Indicator is lit.)
Upper [A-dLO] • Check sensor connections and sensor • Check sensor connections and sensor
Lower !Input x (1 to 3) AtoD - wiring. wiring.
Upper [A-dhi] • Input type may be set to wrong sensor • Check the Sensor parameter to match the
Lower !Input x (1 to 3) AtoD+ or may not be calibrated. sensor hardware.
Upper [SEnLo] • Power may be incorrect. • Measure power upstream for required
Lower !Input x (1 to 3) Sensor- level. Check part number for power re-
quirements.
Upper [SEnhi] • The open loop detect feature shows a • Check sensor function. The Open Loop
Lower !Input x (1 to 3) Sensor+ broken sensor. Detect parameter indicates it may be
broken.
Upper [Atod`] • The Calibration Offset parameter is set • Check the Calibration Offset parameter
Lower !Timeout much too high or low. value. Set it to a lower level.
System Errors
(Upper Display shows error • Input is in error condition. • Check sensor connections.
numbers. Lower Display mes-
sages indicate cause and ac-
tion to take.)
•Input 1 Module Error! Only • Input 2-3 module in input 1 slot. • Move module to correct input slot.
single-channel modules
supported.
• Input 1 Module Error! Only • Input 1 module in input 2-3 slot. • Move module to correct input slot.
dual-channel modules
supported.
• Retransmit 1 Module Error! • Wrong module in retransmit 1 slot. • Replace incorrect module with retransmit
Only process modules module.
supported.
• Retransmit 2 Module Error! • Wrong module in retransmit 2 slot. • Replace incorrect module with retransmit
Only process modules module.
supported.
• Cannot identify: Modify: Re- • Component failure. • Remove the module just installed and
place module. replace with a new module.
• Module change. Defaults will • Module changed. • Press any key. All parameters will
occur. Accept with any key. default.
• First power-up. Parameters • Firmware upgrade. • Wait until initialization is done.
are initializing.
• Firmware change. Parameters • Firmware upgrade. • Wait until initialization is done.
are initializing.
Fatal Errors (Controller shuts

down.)
• Checksum Error!, Parameter • Loss of power during memory setup. • Turn the controller off, then on again.
memory.
• Checksum Error!, Unit config • Loss of power during memory setup. • Turn the controller off, then on again.
memory.
• Checksum Error!, Profile mem- • Loss of power during memory setup. • Turn the controller off, then on again.
ory.
• RAM Test Failed! Return con- • Component failure. • Call your Watlow distributor or represen-
troller to the Factory. tative.
• Flash Memory Failed. Return • Component failure, loss of power • Call your Watlow distributor or represen-
controller to the Factory. during download. tative.

Operations Page Map
Autotune PID PID Set Channel 2
Channel 1 Autotune PID Set 6-10
Tune Off Proportional Band A
PID Set 1 IntegralA / ResetA
PID Set 2 DerivativeA / RateA
PID Set 3 Dead Band A
PID Set 4 Hysteresis A
PID Set 5 Proportional Band B
Channel 2 Autotune IntegralB / ResetB
Tune Off DerivativeB / RateB
PID Set 6 Dead Band B
PID Set 7 Hysteresis B
PID Set 8 Cascade PID Set
PID Set 9 Cascade Set 1-5
PID Set 10 Proportional Band A
Channel 1 Outer Loop Autotune IntegralA / ResetA
PID Set C1 DerivativeA / RateA
PID Set C2 Dead Band A
PID Set C3 Hysteresis A
PID Set C4 Proportional Band B
PID Set C5 IntegralB / ResetB
Edit PID DerivativeB / RateB
PID Set Channel 1 Dead Band B
PID Set 1-5 Hysteresis B
Proportional Band A Alarm Set Points
IntegralA / ResetA Alarm1 Low SP
DerivativeA / RateA Alarm1 High SP
Dead Band A Alarm1 Lo Deviation
Hysteresis A Alarm1 Hi Deviation
Proportional Band B Alarm2 Low SP
IntegralB / ResetB Alarm2 High SP
DerivativeB / RateB Alarm2 Lo Deviation
Dead Band B Alarm2 Hi Deviation
Hysteresis B
✔ NOTE:
Some parameters may not appear, depending on the mod-
el and configuration of the controller.

Operations Page Parameter Table Modbus
Register
Autotune PID
Main > Operations > Autotune PID
Channel x (1 to 2) Autotune Tune Off (0) Tune Off (0) Channel Active: Always (Channel 1).
Ch1 PID Set 1 (1) 305 [1]
Select whether PID Active if controller is set to Dual
Ch1 PID Set 2 (2) 324 [2]
parameters will be r/w Channel Ramping (Channel 2).
Ch1 PID Set 3 (3)
automatically Ch1 PID Set 4 (4)
selected. Ch1 PID Set 5 (5)
Ch2 PID Set 6 (1)
Ch2 PID Set 7 (2)
Ch2 PID Set 8 (3)
Ch2 PID Set 9 (4)
Ch2 PID Set 10 (5)
Autotune PID Cascade
Main > Operations > Autotune PID > Cascade
Cascade Inner Loop Tune Off (0) Tune Off (0) 305 Active if Analog Input 3 Control
Inner Loop PID Set 1 (1) r/w
Select which PID pa- Inner Loop PID Type is set to Cascade.
Set 2 (2)
rameters will be au- Inner Loop PID Set 3 (3)
tomatically tuned. Inner Loop PID Set 4 (4)
Inner Loop PID Set 5 (5)
Cascade Outer Loop Tune Off (0) Tune Off (0) 343 Active if Analog Input 3 Control
Outer Loop PID Set 1 (1) r/w
Select which PID pa- Outer Loop PID Type is set to Cascade.
Set 2 (2)
rameters will be au- Outer Loop PID Set 3 (3)
tomatically tuned. Outer Loop PID Set 4 (4)
Outer Loop PID Set 5 (5)
Edit PID
Main > Operations > Edit PID
PID Set x (1 to 5)* (Optional Inner Loop)
Main > Operations > Edit PID > PID Set Channel 1 > PID Set x (1 to 5)
Proportional Band x (A or B) 0 to 30000 25°F (25) 1A 1B Set Active: Always (Channel 1).
500 550 [1]
Define the propor- (0 to 30000) 14°C (14) °F Default for US
510 560 [2]
tional band for PID 520 570 [3] °C Default for SI
530 580 [4]
control.
540 590 [5]
r/w
Integral x (A or B) 0.00 to 300.00 minutes 0 minutes 1A 1B Set Active if PID Units (Setup Page)
501 551 [1]
Set the integral time (0 to 30000) (0)
511 561 [2]
is set to SI and Proportional
in minutes. 521 571 [3] Band is not set to 0.
531 581 [4]
541 591 [5]
r/w
Reset x (A or B) 0.00 per minute to 0 per minute 1A 1B Set Active if PID Units (Setup Page)
502 552 [1]
Set the reset time in 99.99 per minute (0) is set to U.S. and Proportional
512 562 [2]
repeats per minute. (0 to 9999) 522 572 [3] Band is not set to 0.
532 582 [4]
542 592 [5]
r/w
Derivative x (A or B) 0.00 to 9.99 minutes 0.00 minutes 1A 1B Set Active if PID Units (Setup Page)
503 553 [1]
Set the derivative (0 to 999) (0) is set to SI and Proportional
513 563 [2]
time. 523 573 [3] Band is not set to 0.
533 583 [4]
543 593 [5]
r/w
*This section is also applicable for Cascade Inner Loop.

✔ NOTE: For more information about how parameter settings
affect the controller’s operation, see the Features Chapter.

Register
Rate x (A or B) 0.00 to 9.99 minutes 0.00 minutes 1A 1B Set Active if PID Units (Setup Page)
504 554 [1]
Set the rate time. (0 to 999) (0) is set to U.S. and Proportional
514 564 [2]
524 574 [3] Band is not set to 0.
534 584 [4]
544 594 [5]
r/w
Dead Band x (A or B) 0 to 30000 0 1A 1B Set Active if Proportional Band is not

505 555 [1]
Define the effective (0 to 30000) (0) set to 0 and one output is set to
515 565 [2]
shift in the heating 525 575 [3] heat and the other to cool
and cooling set 535 585 [4] (Setup Page).
545 595 [5]
points to prevent r/w
conflict.
Hysteresis x (A or B) 1 to 30000 3 (3) 1A 1B Set Active if Proportional Band is set
507 557 [1]
Define the process (1 to 30000) to 0 and one channel is set to
517 567 [2]
variable change from 527 577 [3] heat and the other to cool
the set point re- 537 587 [4] (Setup Page).
547 597 [5]
quired to re-energize r/w
the output (in on-off
mode).
PID Set x (6 to 10)
Main > Operations > Edit PID > PID Set Channel 2 > PID Set x (6 to 10)
2500 2550 [6]
Set the proportional (1 to 30000) 14°C (14)
2510 2560 [7]
band. 2520 2570 [8]
2530 2580 [9]
2540 2590 [10]
r/w
2501 2551 [6]
2511 2561 [7]
2531 2581 [9]
2541 2591 [10]
r/w
2502 2552 [6]
2512 2562 [7]
2532 2582 [9]
2542 2592 [10]
r/w
2503 2553 [6]
2513 2563 [7]
2533 2583 [9]
2543 2593 [10]
r/w
2504 2554 [6]
2514 2564 [7]
2534 2584 [9]
2544 2594 [10]
r/w
✔ NOTE: Press the Information Key ˆ for more task-related tips.

Register
Dead Band x (A or B) 0 to 30000 0 (0) 2A 2B Set Active if Proportional Band is not

2505 2555 [6]
Define the effective (1 to 30000) set to 0 and one output is set to
2515 2565 [7]
2545 2595 [10]
conflict.
2507 2557 [6]
2517 2567 [7]
2547 2597 [10]
mode).
Cascade Outer Loop PID Set x (1 to 5)
Main > Operations > Edit PID > Cascade Outer Loop PID Set X (1 to 5)
2600 2650 [1]
Define the propor- (0 to 30000) 14°C (14) °F Default for US
2610 2660 [2]
tional band for PID 2620 2670 [3] °C Default for SI
2630 2680 [4]
control.
2640 2690 [5]
r/w
2601 2651 [1]
2611 2661 [2]
2631 2681 [4]
2641 2691 [5]
r/w
2602 2652 [1]
2612 2662 [2]
2632 2682 [4]
2642 2692 [5]
r/w
2603 2653 [1]
2613 2663 [2]
2633 2683 [4]
2643 2693 [5]
r/w
2604 2654 [1]
2614 2664 [2]
2634 2684 [4]
2644 2694 [5]
r/w
Dead Band x (A or B) 0 to 30000 0 1A 1B Set Active if Proportional Band is not

2605 2655 [1]
Define the effective (0 to 30000) (0) set to 0 and one output is set to
2615 2665 [2]
2645 2695 [5]
conflict.


Register

2607 2657 [1]
2617 2667 [2]
2647 2697 [5]
mode).
Alarm Set Points
Main > Operations > Alarm Set Points
Alarm 1 Low SP <per sensor> to Alarm <per sensor> 302 Active if Alarm 1 Type (Setup
Set low value at 1 High Set Point r/w Page) is set to Process.
which alarm is trig-
gered.
Alarm 1 High SP <per sensor> to Alarm <per sensor> 303 Active if Alarm 1 Type (Setup
Set high value at 1 Low Set Point r/w Page) is set to Process.
gered.
Alarm 1 Low Deviation -19999 to -1 -999 (-999) 302 Active if Alarm 1 Type (Setup
Set the deviation (-1 to 19999) r/w Page) is set to Deviation.
below set point 1
that will trigger an -.1 to -1999.9 -99.9 (999) Active if decimal is set to 0.0.
alarm. (-1 to 19999)
Alarm 1 High Deviation 1 to 30000 999 (999) 303 Active if Alarm 1 Type (Setup
Set the deviation (1 to 30000) r/w Page) is set to Deviation.
above set point 1
that will trigger an .1 to 3000.0 99.9 (999) Active if decimal is set to 0.0
alarm. (1 to 30000)
Alarm 2 Low SP <per sensor> to Alarm <per sensor> 321 Active if Alarm 2 Type (Setup
Set low value at 2 High Set Point r/w Page) is set to Process.
gered.
Alarm 2 High SP <per sensor> to Alarm <per sensor> 322 Active if Alarm 2 Type (Setup
Set high value at 2 Low Set Point r/w Page) is set to Process.
gered.
Alarm 2 Low Deviation -19999 to -1 -999 (-999) 321 Active if Alarm 2 Type (Setup
Set the deviation (-1 to -19999) r/w Page) is set to Deviation.
below set point 2
that will trigger an -.1 to -1999.9 -99.9 (-999) Active if decimal is set to 0.0
alarm. (-1 to -19999)
Alarm 2 High Deviation 0 to 30000 999 (999) 322 Active if Alarm 2 Type (Setup
Set the deviation (0 to 30000) r/w Page) is set to Deviation.
above set point 2
that will trigger an
alarm.

Operations Page Parameter Record
Make a photocopy of this page and enter your settings on that copy.
Name _________________________________________________
Date __________________________________________________
Operations Page
PID Set Chan 1 Menu PID Set 1 PID Set 2 PID Set 3 PID Set 4 PID Set 5
or Cascade Inner Loop
Proportional Band A
IntegralA / ResetA
DerivativeA / RateA
Dead Band A
Hysteresis A
Proportional Band B
IntegralB / ResetB
DerivativeB / RateB
Dead Band B
Hysteresis B
PID Set Chan 2 Menu PID Set 6 PID Set 7 PID Set 8 PID Set 9 PID Set 10
Proportional Band A
IntegralA / ResetA
DerivativeA / RateA
Dead Band A
Hysteresis A
Proportional Band B
IntegralB / ResetB
DerivativeB / RateB
Dead Band B
Hysteresis B
Cascade Outer Loop PID Set 1 PID Set 2 PID Set 3 PID Set 4 PID Set 5
Proportional Band A
IntegralA / ResetA
DerivativeA / RateA
Dead Band A
Proportional Band B
IntegralB / ResetB
DerivativeB / RateB
Dead Band B
Alarm Set Point Menu Alarm 1 Alarm 2
Low Set Point
High Set Point
Lo Deviation
Hi Deviation

Notes

4
Chapter Four: Profile Programming
What is a Ramping Profile? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2
Step Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2
Profile Plan Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3
How to Program a New Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4
How to Edit a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6
User Profile Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7
A Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
Profiles Page Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11
Profiles Page Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.12
Overview
This chapter explains how to program a ramp-and- choose from a list of the steps and their param-
soak profile so that it will be stored in the Series eters, much like in previous controllers.
F4 memory. • You will also find a User Profile Record to use
• The first section explains profiles, steps and to record the steps and parameters for your
step types. profiles.
• The second section explains how to name and If you receive this controller as a separate unit, you
program a ramping profile. The Series F4 pre- will have to install, wire and configure the Series
sents a sequence of questions that prompt you F4 before you set up a ramping profile.
to define the steps and the step properties. If you receive this controller already installed in an
While reading this section, refer to the profile environmental chamber, furnace or other equip-
already embedded in the Series F4 software. ment, continue with this chapter. You will not have
You can use this profile, Military Standard Test to configure the controller if the manufacturer has
810 (MILSTD 810D), as a template and learn- done this for you. You should check the Setup Page
ing tool. in the controller software for settings of relevant
• The third section explains how to edit and inputs and outputs.
delete an existing profile. In the Series F4, you
✔ NOTE: ✔ NOTE:
For more information about how parameter settings affect Make sure your controller inputs are properly
the controller’s operation, see the Features Chapter. configured before entering profiles. Analog Input
setup changes may delete profiles.
✔ NOTE:
If your Series F4 is a single-channel controller, you will
see only the temperature on Channel 1 of the embedded
profile. This is not the true Military Standard Test 810D.
Watlow Series F4S/D Profile Programming ■ 4.1

What Is a Ramping Profile?
A ramp is a programmed change from one set
point to another. A soak maintains the set point
over a period of time.
A profile is a set of instructions programmed as a
sequence of steps. The controller handles the pro-
Temperature
file steps automatically, in sequence. As many as 40
different profiles and a total of 256 steps can be
stored in the Series F4’s non-volatile memory.
The 256 steps are grouped by profile. So, one pro-
file could have 256 steps; or 39 profiles could have
6 steps and one could have 22; or 32 profiles could
have eight steps each. The maximum number of Time
steps is 256, and the maximum number of profiles
is 40.
Figure 4.2 — An eight-step profile, as it might be logged
on a chart recorder.
Step Types — Building Blocks of Profiles

Six types of steps are available in the Series F4. 2. Event outputs to turn on or off (if digital out-
They are the building blocks of ramping profiles. puts are set up as events in the Setup Page);
Use the six step types to create simple or complex 3. Time (in hours, minutes and seconds);
profiles involving all inputs and outputs. The Se- 4. Channel 1 Set Point;
ries F4 prompts you to define each step’s proper-
ties, listed below. 5. Channel 2 Set Point (if dual channel);
6. PID set (one of five sets of heat/cool PID pa-
• Autostart
rameters per channel, pre-defined in the Oper-
• Ramp Time ations Page);
• Ramp Rate
7. Guaranteed Soak (requires the actual process
• Soak
value to stay within the Soak Band as set in
• Jump
the System Menu).
• End
F4S 1
Autostart Single
Ramp Rate Channel
Autostart pauses a profile until the specified date

or day, and time (of a 24-hour-clock). Define the Au- Ramp Rate (for single channel only) changes the
tostart by choosing: set point to a new value at a chosen rate. Define
the Ramp Rate step by choosing:
1. Day (of the week) or Date,
1. Wait for an event or process value;
2. Time
(Wait for Events are set up in the Setup Page.)
Note: To invoke an Autostart step in a profile, you 2. Event outputs to turn on or off (if digital out-
must activate the profile via the Profile Key and se- puts are set up as events in the Setup Page);
lect the Autostart step.
3. Rate (units per minute);
Ramp Time 4. Channel 1 Set Point;
Ramp Time changes the set point to a new value in 5. PID set (one of five sets of heat/cool PID pa-
a chosen period of time. Ramp Time is the same for rameters, pre-defined in the Operations Page);
both channels of a dual-channel controller. Define 6. Guaranteed Soak (requires the actual process
the Ramp Time step by choosing: value to stay within the Soak Band as set in
1. Wait for an event or process value; the System Menu).
(Wait for Events are set up in the Setup Page.)
4.2 ■ Profile Programming Watlow Series F4S/D
Soak process value must arrive at or cross the specified
value before the step proceeds.
Soak maintains the set point from the previous
step for a chosen time in hours, minutes and sec- Digital inputs must first be configured in the Setup
onds. Define the Soak step by choosing: Page as Wait for Events, with the condition to be
met also specified. Then, to wait for this digital
1. Wait for an event or process value; input, you must specify On, meaning the condition
(Wait for Events are set up in the Setup Page.) as configured in the Setup Page, or Off, meaning
2. Event outputs to turn on or off (if digital out- the opposite of that condition.
puts are set up as events in the Setup Page);
3. Time;
4. PID set (one of five sets of heat/cool PID pa-
rameters per channel, pre-defined in the Opera-
Profile Plan Checklist
tions Page); or 1. Configure the controller (Setup Page) to
5. Guaranteed Soak (requires the actual process provide the right foundation for the profile:
value to stay within the Soak Band as set in ❏ Set the appropriate input sensor ranges
the System Menu). and limits (Input Menus).
❏ Establish digital inputs and outputs as
Jump events if required (Digital Input and
Output Menus).
Jump initiates another step or profile. Define the
Jump step by choosing: ❏ Set the guaranteed soak band (System
Menu).
1. Profile to jump to;
❏ Decide the controller response to a
2. Step to jump to; and
power-out situation (System Menu).
3. Number of Repeats.
❏ Choose Celsius or Fahrenheit (System
✔ NOTE: Menu) scale.
If a power out condition occurs during a profile and ❏ If Setup Page values have not been
more than 20 jump steps are stored in the F4’s Profile recorded, note them on the Setup Page
Program memory, the controller will terminate the profile Parameter Record in the Setup Chapter.
and turn off all outputs if Continue, Hold or Terminate
2. Check the Operations Page:
was selected as the Power Out action. If Profile Reset or
Go to Idle Set Point was selected, the controller will take ❏ If defaults are not acceptable, establish
those actions. A pop-up message will warn of this when PID values (through the Autotune or
the 21st jump step is programmed
Edit PID Menu).
❏ Set the alarm set points (Alarm Set
End Points Menu).
End terminates the profile in a chosen state. All 3. Plan the profile on paper. The User Pro-
profiles must have an End step. It cannot be delet- file Record (later in this chapter) will give
ed or changed to another step type. Define the End you a framework for your plan.
by choosing:
4. Program the profile. Make sure the User
• End with Hold, Control Off, All Off or Idle end Profile Record is an accurate record of the
state. program.
5. Store the Setup Page Parameter
Another Option: Wait For Record along with the User Profile Record
Wait For is not a step type, but Ramp Time, Ramp to document your programmed settings.
Rate and Soak steps can be programmed to wait for
events and processes. This means the wait condi-
tions must be satisfied before the time clock and
the step activity proceeds.
If the step is to wait for an analog input, the actual

How to Program a New Profile
F4
1A
The Series F4 uses a question-and-answer format 1B
to prompt you to define the steps and step types of 2A
2B
a new profile. Here’s how: Main Page___________

Go to Profiles
1
Go to Setup 2
1.Go to the Profiles Page.

Go to Factory
Move the cursor to Go to Profiles (at the bottom

of the Main Page), then press the Right Key . . i
2.Create a new profile.

Press .
Press . . to enter
Main>Profile________
3.Name the profile. >Create Profile
Unless the equipment manufacturer has locked Edit Profile
out this function, you can name your profiles for Delete Profile
easy reference. (Names can have up to 10 char-
acters.) To name a profile,
Choose to Name:_____
• Press . to enter the name space and the No
first position. >Yes
• Press the Up or Down Key > < to scroll
through the alphabet and choose the letter
or number. (See Chapter 2, Navigation, for
the character selections available.)
Enter Profile Name:_
• Press . to move to the next position. ALUMINUM8
• Continue until the name is complete, or ▲ ▼ Adjusts Char
until you move through the name space into < Back > Next
the next screen.
• Enter . to save the name of the profile.
This name will be stored in the Series F4’s
memory and will appear on the Main Page
when you run the profile.
Choose Step1 Type:__
4.Choose the step type. Autostart
There are six step types, each of which must be >Ramp Ti me ■
defined through different parameters. (See “Step Ramp Rate ▼
Types,” earlier in this chapter.)
Choose to wait:_____
5.Define each step type. >Step does not wait
The Series F4 prompts you to define the param- Step waits for…
eters of each step type. For example, when you
choose Ramp Time, the Profile Guide asks:
• if you want the step to wait for an event or
process input before starting;
• whether events outputs are on or off (digital
outputs must be set up as events in the
Setup Page);

• how much time it will take to reach set
point;
• what the set point is;
• which PID set to activate; and
• whether you want a guaranteed soak.
Enter Ramp Time:____
Continue defining step types until your pro- 00:00:01 (H:M:S)
file is complete. The last step must be an End ▼ ▲ Adjusts Digit
step. < > Save Changes
6.Choose the end-state.
All profiles end with an End step, which is pre-
programmed into the new profile. Choose:
• Hold set point and event outputs;
• Control off, set point off, event output sta-
tus maintained;
• All Off (control outputs and event outputs)
or
• Idle, with each channel at user-specified set
points. Event output status maintained.
Save profile data ■
7.Save your settings. or restore values? ■
When exiting the Profiles Page, choose whether ▼ Restore ▲ Save ■
to save profile data > or restore values < . ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
✔ NOTE:
The final step of every profile is End. You cannot delete an
End step or change it to another type, but you can insert
new steps before it.
Get Information from the ˆ Key i Ramp Time: A step

type that changes
If you do not know a term, press the ˆ Key the set point to a ■
when the cursor points to the word in the dis- new value in a ▼
play text. Or check the glossary in the Ap- user-chosen period
pendix of this user manual. of time.

How to Edit a Profile
To change one or more parameters in any step of a
profile, choose Edit Profile on the Profiles Page.
1. Go to the Profiles Page.

Move the cursor to Go to Profile (at the bottom
of the Main Page), then press . .
2.Choose to edit a profile.

Main>Profile________ .
Create Profile
Press . . >Edit Profile
Delete Profile
3.Choose the profile you want to edit. …Edit Profile_______ .
Press . . >Glaze 42 ▲
Glaze 43 ■
4.Choose how you change the profile. Glaze 56 ▼
Choose whether you want to insert a new step,
edit a specific step or delete a step.
To edit a step: Choose to:__________ .

Insert Step
• Select the number of the step you wish to edit >Edit Step
from a list of steps and step types. Delete Step
• The next screen presents a list of all possible
step types. The cursor will be positioned on
the current step type. To keep it, press . and
make your changes to the properties listed on
succeeding screens.
• If you choose to change a Step Type, the Se- Edit Step:__________ .
ries F4 will prompt you to program all neces- >Step 1 Autostart
sary parameters. Step 2 Ramp Time ■
Step 3 Soak ▼
To insert a step:
Move the cursor to the number of the step that
the new step will precede. Press . . The Series
F4 will prompt you to program all necessary pa-
rameters of the new step. Inserting a step
changes the numbers of all steps that follow.
To delete a step:
Move the cursor to the number of the step to be
deleted. Press . . Deleting a step changes the
numbers of all steps that follow.
A Jump Step that jumps to an End Step cannot
be deleted.
✔ NOTE:
Inserting a step changes the numbers of all steps that
follow.

User Profile Record
Copy this record and use it to plan profiles. Keep it
with a Setup Page Parameter Record to document
the controller’s programmed settings.
Profile Name:__________________________________
Date Programmed: ____________________________
Programmed by: ______________________________
Controller checked by:__________________________
Step Step Date/Day, Wait Set Events Time Rate Set Set PID Guar. Jump to Step Repeats End
Nmbr Type Time for 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HMS Pt 1 Pt 2 Set Soak Profile Step

A Sample Application: Environmental Testing
Programming a Profile
To test its customers’ navigational equipment,
1A
1B
2A
F4
Ajax Testing Co. selected a version of Military Standard
Test 810D, which is often used to test navigational or
2B
Main Page___________ 1
Go to Profiles
Go to Setup 2
Go to Factory
other military equipment under hot, humid conditions.

The full test requires a two-channel controller to manipu-
late both temperature and humidity in an environmental
chamber.
Andy planned his profile on the User Profile

Record,
after checking the Setup Page to make sure the con-
troller’s inputs, outputs, limits and ranges were config-
This profile is embedded in the Series F4 ured properly. Andy then programmed the profile into the
software for use as a teaching tool and as Series F4.
a template. To see how it is programmed
in steps, and how each step is defined, go
to the Profiles Page, choose Edit Profile
and open MILSTD 810D.
If your Series F4 is a single-channel con-
troller, you will see only the temperature
on Channel 1. This is NOT the true Mili-
tary Standard Test 810D.
Military Standard 810D

Step 1: Ramp Time Initialize the set point for channels 1 and 2.
Step 2: Soak Wait for channels 1 and 2 process values to reach their set points before the test
proceeds.
Step 3: Soak To ensure that the equipment temperature has stabilized, expose the equipment
in the chamber to a temperature of 88°F and an RH of 88% for five hours.
Steps 4 to 11: Ramp Time The test calls for a programmed increase in temperature and decrease in relative
humidity over a period of eight hours.
Step 12: Soak Expose the equipment in the chamber to a temperature of 105°F and an RH of
59% for three hours.
Steps 13 to 19: Ramp Time The test calls for a programmed decrease in temperature and increase in relative
humidity over a period of seven hours.
Step 20: Jump Jump to step 3 and repeat steps 3 to 20 twenty times.
Step 21: End End the profile and turn off all outputs.

Step Step Date/Day, Wait Set Events Time Rate Set Set PID Guar. Jump to Step Repeats End
Nmbr Type Time for 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HMS Pt 1 Pt 2 Set Soak Profile Step
1 Ramp Time 1 sec. 88°F 88%
2 Soak Process1&2 1 sec.
3 Soak 5 hrs.
4 Ramp Time 1 hr. 90°F 85%
10 Ramp Time 1 hr. 104°F 62%
11 Ramp Time 1 hr. 105°F 59%
12 Soak Process1&2 3 hrs.
13 Ramp Time 1 hr. 102°F 65%
20 Jump 3 20
21 End All Off
Figure 9a — Profile Chart for Military Standard 810D Test.
106
104
Relative Humidity
Temperature ( F) 88
86 2
Dual
84
Channel
F4D
102 82
80
100
78
% Relative Humidity
76
Temperature ( F)
98
74
96 72
70
94
68
66
92
64
90 62
60
88 58
Test Period in Hours

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Step
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Steps
Channel 1 End of test
Channel 2 Step 20 jumps to Step 3 and repeats 20 times.
Figure 9b — Graph of Military Standard 810D Test.

Frequently Asked Questions About Profiles
1. Why should I check the Setup Page before 7. Why can’t I delete the End step?
programming a profile?
Because every profile must have an End step, and
Complex, sophisticated profile control is possible this End step is programmed into the profile. If you
with the Series F4’s two or three analog inputs, wish to add a step before the end, use the Insert
four digital inputs, four control outputs (two for a Step command under the Edit Profiles Menu.
single-channel controller), two alarm outputs, two
retransmit outputs and eight digital outputs, but
they must be configured correctly. Don’t assume 8. How do I start or run a profile?
that the controller has been set up correctly for the
profile you want to program and run. Checking the You must be on the the Main Page to run a profile.
Setup Page first will save time. Press the Profile Key, select the profile you want to
run and choose the step you want to start on.
2. Why can’t I program a Ramp Rate step on 9. I just programmed the profile, but when I
Channel 2? press the Profile Key nothing happens. What’s
Ramp Rate is available only on single-channel con- wrong?
trollers.
You must return to the Main Page before running a
profile. The Profile Key does not function from any
3. Why can’t I set the Channel 2 parameters? other page but the Main Page.
Channel 2 parameters do not appear in single-
channel controllers, or Input 2 is Off in a dual- 10. How do I know which profile is running?
channel controller.
When a profile is running, the profile name and
current step number is displayed on the Main
4. Why can’t I adjust the set point to get the Page. You may have to scroll up or down to find
value I want? this information.
Check the configuration of the inputs (Setup Page)
and the set point limits (Setup Page). 11. Why can’t I access certain pages, menus or
parameters?
5. Why don’t the digital inputs appear as Wait The parameters you are looking for may not be
for conditions? available in your model of controller.
They must first be configured as events in the The OEM that installed the F4 may have locked
Setup Page. users out of certain pages and menus.
The F4’s software may have been locked by a su-
6. Why can’t I delete a particular step of my
pervisor or someone else at your facility.
profile?
If a profile is running, you can enter only the Pro-
You cannot delete a step that another step jumps
files Page.
to, or a step that is an End step.

Profiles Page Map Edit Profile
Profile x (1 to 40)
Create Profile Insert Step
Name Profile Insert Before Step x
Step x (1 to 256) Type Step x (1 to 256) Type (see below)
Autostart Edit Step
Date Step x (1 to 256) Type
Day Autostart
Time Date
Ramp Time Day
Wait For Ramp Time
Event Output (1 to 8) Wait For
Time Event Output (1 to 8)
Ch1 SP Time
Ch2 SP Ch1 SP
Ch1 PID Set x (1 to 5) Ch2 SP
Ch2 PID Set x (6 to 10) Ch1 PID Set x (1 to 5)
Guar. Soak1 Ch2 PID Set x (6 to 10)
Guar. Soak2 Guarantee Soak1
Ramp Rate Guarantee Soak2
Wait For Ramp Rate
Rate Event Output (1 to 8)
Ch1 SP Rate
Ch1 PID Set x (1 to 5) Ch1 SP
Soak Guarantee Soak1
Wait For Soak
Time Event Output (1 to 8)
Ch1 PID Set x (1 to 5) Time
Ch2 PID Set x (6 to 10) Ch1 PID Set x (1 to 5)
Guar. Soak2 Guarantee Soak1
Jump Guarantee Soak2
Jump to Profile x (1 to 40) Jump
Jump to Step x Jump to Profile x (1 to 40)
Number of Repeats Jump to Step x
End Number of Repeats
Hold End
Control Off Hold
All Off Control Off
Idle All Off
Ch1 Idle Set Point Idle
Ch2 Idle Set Point Ch1 Idle Set Point
Ch2 Idle Set Point
Delete Step
Done
Delete Profile
Profile x (1 to 40)
Re-Name Profile
✔ NOTE: Profile x (1 to 40)
Some parameters may not appear, depending on the
model and configuration of the controller.

Profiles Page Parameter Table Modbus
Register
Autostart
…>Edit Profile > Profile x (1 to 40) > Edit Step > Step x (1 to 256) > Autostart Step
Date M/D/Y today’s date 4004 [Date] Active: Always.
[Date] (0) or [Day]
Set date to [Day] (1) 4005 [mo]
autostart. [mo] (1 to 12)
4006 [day]
4007 [yr]
[day] (1 to 31)
r/w
[yr] (1998 to 2035)
Day Every Day (0) Every Day (0) 4008 r/w Active: Always.
Sunday (1)
Set day of the week
Monday (2)
to autostart.
Tuesday (3)
Wednesday (4)
Thursday (5)
Friday (6)
Saturday (7)
Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 4009 Active: Always.
[h] (0 to 23) [h] (0) 4010
Set time to [m] (0 to 59) [m] (0) 4011
autostart. [s] (0 to 59) [s] (0) r/w
Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step

…>Edit Profile > Profile x (1 to 40) > Edit Step > Step x (1 to 256) > Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step
Wait for Step does not wait (0) Step does not 4012 r/w Active if digital inputs are config-
Step waits for…(1) wait (0) 4103 r ured as wait for events.
Wait for an event or
process value. (Digi-
tal inputs must be
configured in the
Setup Page before
they can be used
here.) The F4 can be
programmed to wait
for up to 4 event in-
puts and 3 analog in-
puts.
Event Output Digital Outputs 1 to 8 Dig Active if digital outputs are con-
Out
Off (0) figured as events.
Turn an event out- 4030 r/w [1]
put on or off. (Digital On (1)
4111 r [1]
4031 r/w [2]
outputs must be con- 4112 r [2]
figured in the Setup 4032 r/w [3])
4113 r [3])
Page before they can
4033 r/w [4]
be used here. Verify 4114 r [4]
that the setup 4034 r/w [5]
matches events.) 4115 r [5]
4035 r/w [6]
4116 r [6]
4036 r/w [7]
4117 r [7]
4037 r/w [8]
4118 r [8]
✔ NOTE: To edit profiles through serial communications, see p. 7.17,

✔ NOTE: Two sets of Modbus registers contain profile information:
In edit mode, the number of the profile being edited is at 4000, and
the number of the step being edited is at 4001. When the profile is
running, the number of the profile being run is at 4100, and the
number of the step being run is at 4101. All run addresses are read
only.

Register
Time 00:00:01 to 99:59:59 00:00:01 Ch Active if Step is set to Ramp

4009 r/w [h]
[h] (0 to 99) (0) Time or Soak.
Set the time in 4119 r [h]
hours, minutes and [m] (0 to 59) (0) 4010 r/w [m]
4120 r [m]
seconds. [s] (0 to 59) (1) 4011 r/w [s]
4121 r [s]
Rate .1 to 3,000.0 degrees .1 4043 r/w Active if Step is set to Rate and
per minute controller is not Dual Channel.
Select the rate of
(1 to 30000)
change by entering
degrees per minute.
Set Point Channel 1 Set point low limit to 75 (75) 4044 r/w Active if Step is set to Time or
set point high limit 4122 r Rate.
Set the target for the
Channel 1 process
value (temperature,
etc.) at the end of
this step.
Set Point Channel 2 Set point low limit to 75 (75) 4045 r/w Active if Step is set to Time and
set point high limit 4123 r controller is Dual Channel.
Set the target for the
Channel 2 process
value (temperature,
etc.) at the end of
this step.
PID Set Channel 1 PID 1 to 5 [1] (0) Ch Active: Always.
4046 r/w [1]
Channel 2 PID 6 to 10 [2] (0) 4124 r [1]
Select the PID set
for each channel. [1] (0 to 4) 4047 r/w [2]
4125 r [2]
[2] (0 to 4)
Guarantee Soak No (0) No (0) Ch Active: Always.
4048 r/w [1]
Yes (1) 4049 r/w [2]
Select this feature.
Wait for:
… > Profile (1 to 40) > Edit Step > Step x (1 to 256) > Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step > Wait for:
Step Does/Does Not Wait Does not wait (0) — 4012 r/w —
Wait for (1)
Do not wait for any
condition.
Step Wait For… Event Input x (1 to 4) 4012 r/w Active: Always.
Analog Input x (1 to 3)
Wait for the chosen
condition.
✔ NOTE: Two sets of Modbus registers contain profile informa-

tion: In edit mode, the number of the profile being edited is at
4000, and the number of the step being edited is at 4001. When
the profile is running, the number of the profile being run is at
4100, and the number of the step being run is at 4101. All run
addresses are read only.


Register
Event Input x (1 to 4) Don’t Wait (0) Don’t Wait (0) Input Active if the selected Event Input
4013 r/w [1]
Wait for Off (1) is Enabled.
Select whether or 4104 r [1]
not to wait for a dig- Wait for On (2)
4014 r/w [2]
4105 r [2]
ital signal to initiate 4015 r/w [3]
this step. 4106 r [3]
4016 r/w [4]
4107 rw [4]
Analog Input x (1 to 3) Don’t Wait (0) Don’t Wait (0) 4021 r/w [1] Active if the selected Analog
4108 r [1]
Wait (1) Input is present (Analog Input
Select whether or 4023 r/w [2]
4109 r [2] 1 always is).
not to wait for a 4025 r/w [3]
process value to ini- 4110 r [3]
tiate this step.
… > Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step > Wait for: > To Wait for > Analog Input x (1 to 3)
Enter Analog Input x Range Low to Range Follow input Input Active: Always.
4022 r/w [1]
High selected
Select the process 4024 r/w [2]
4026 r/w [3]
value that will initi-
ate this step.
Event Output
… > Edit Step > Step x (1 to 256) > Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step > Event Output
Output x (1 to 8) Off (0) Off (0) Output Active if the associated Digital
4030 r/w [1]
On (1) Output is set to Event.
Select this Digital 4111 r [1]
4031 r/w [2]
Output to be on or 4112 r [2]
off. 4032 r/w [3]
4113 r [3]
4033 r/w [4]
4114 r [4]
4034 r/w [5]
4115 r [5]
4035 r/w [6]
4116 r [6]
4036 r/w [7]
4117 r [7]
4037 r/w [8]
4118 r [8]
ç
WARNING:
Check the configuration of the controller on the Setup Page be-
fore starting and running a profile (if the Setup Page is not
locked). Make sure settings are appropriate to the profile. If
the Setup Page is accessible, failure to check the configuration
before running a profile could result in damage to equipment
and/or property, and/or injury or death to personnel.


Register
PID Set
… > Profile x (1 to 40) > Edit Step > Step x (1 to 256) > Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step > PID Set
Channel 1 PID Set 1 (0) PID Set 1 (0) 4046 r/w Active: Always.
PID Set 2 (1) 4124 r
Select a PID set for
channel 1. PID Set 3 (2)
PID Set 4 (3)
PID Set 5 (4)
Channel 2 PID Set 6 (0) PID Set 6 (0) 4047 r/w Active if controller is Dual
PID Set 7 (1) 4125 r Channel.
Select a PID set for
channel 2. PID Set 8 (2)
PID Set 9 (3)
PID Set 10 (4)
Jump
\Main > Profiles > Edit Profile > Profile x (1 to 40) > Edit Step > Step x (1 to 256) > Jump Step
Jump To Profile 1 to 40 or name — 4050 r/w —
(1 to 40)
Select name or num-
ber of profile to jump
to.
Step x (1 to 256) 1 to 256 1 (1) 4051 r/w Active: Always.
(1 to 256)
Select number of
steps to jump to.
Number of Repeats* 1 to 999 1 (1) 4052 r/w Active: Always.
(1 to 999)
Set number of times
to repeat the chosen
Jump.
End
Main > Profiles > Edit Profile > Profile x (1 to 40) > Edit Step > Step x (1 to 256) > End
Action Hold (0) All Off (2) 4060 r/w Active: Always.
Control Off (1)
Select what state
the controller will be All Off (2)
in at the end of the Idle (3)
profile.
*✔ NOTE:
If a power out condition occurs during a profile and more than 20 jump steps are stored in the F4’s Profile Program
memory, the controller will terminate the profile and turn off all outputs if Continue, Hold or Terminate was selected as
the Power Out action. If Profile Reset or Go to Idle Set Point was selected, the controller will take those actions. A pop-
up message will warn of this when the 21st jump step is programmed
✔ NOTE: Two sets of Modbus registers contain profile information: In edit mode, the number of the profile being edit-
ed is at 4000, and the number of the step being edited is at 4001. When the profile is running, the number of the pro-
file being run is at 4100, and the number of the step being run is at 4101. All run addresses are read only.
✔ NOTE: For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller’s operation, see the Features Chapter.

Register
Idle
Main > Profiles > Edit Profile > Profile x (1 to 40) > Edit Step / Step x (1 to 256) > Step > End > Idle
Enter Channel 1 Idle Set Set Point 1 Low Limit 75 (75) 4061 r/w Active: Always (Channel 1).
Point to Set Point 1 High
Limit
Select the channel 1
set point to be main-
tained after the pro-
file ends.
Enter Channel 2 Idle Set Set Point 2 Low Limit 75 (75) 4062 r/w Active if controller is set to Dual
Point to Set Point 2 High Channel Ramping (Channel 2).
Limit
Select the channel 2
set point to be main-
tained after the pro-
file ends.

✔ NOTE: Press the Information Key ˆ for task-related tips.

5
Chapter Five: Setup
Setup Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1
Parameter Setup Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1
Customizing the Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2
Custom Main Page Parameter Record . . . . . . . . . .5.3
Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4
Setup Page Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.6
Setup Page Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.7
Setup Page Parameter Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
Overview Setup Guidelines

Setup Page parameters affect many areas of the
This chapter presents information about configur- controller’s function:
ing the controller software through the Setup Page.
• which parameters and functions are visible in
This is where you:
other pages;
• indicate what hardware the input and output
• the way the controller responds to your applica-
pins will be connected to;
tion; and
• indicate how the inputs and outputs will func-
• the way information is displayed on the Main
tion (Some of the inputs, outputs and functions
Page.
may not be visible, depending on the model
number of your controller); Setting up the controller properly will provide a
sound foundation for settings in other pages.
• choose Celsius or Fahrenheit scales;
• make other choices about the display of infor-
mation on the Main Page and in the Upper Parameter Setup Order
(LED) Display; and Initial configuration of the Series F4 is best done in
• set up computer communications with the con- the following order:
troller. 1. Go to the System Menu (Setup Page). Here you
Many control features are explained in greater will indicate:
depth in the Features Chapter. • the current time and date;
To reach the Setup Page from the Main Page, move • preference of PID units — U.S. (Reset,
the cursor to Go to Setup, then press the Right . Rate) or SI (Integral, Derivative);
Key. • preference of Celsius or Fahrenheit scales;
• whether or not to display these units in the
controller’s Upper Display,
✔ NOTE: ✔ NOTE:
If the Series F4 is already installed in an environmental To see how all the pages, menus and parameters are
chamber, oven, furnace or other equipment, most parame- grouped, see the software map on the inside back cover of
ters will already be configured and access to the Setup this manual.
Page may be limited (locked). ✔ NOTE:
For more information about how parameter settings affect
the controller’s operation, see the Features Chapter.
Watlow Series F4S/D Setup ■ 5.1

• the guaranteed soak band for each channel; After the initial configuration of the controller, the
• open-loop detection warnings on or off; and most frequent changes will be to profiles, alarm set
• profile-power outage actions. points and PID sets. The Setup Page is likely to be
the least frequently accessed for changes. Some
2. Go the Setup Page and define all inputs, out- manufacturers may prefer to lock out this page to
puts and alarms: prevent user access.
• Analog Input x (1 to 3);
Changing parameters may change other parame-
• Digital Input x (1 to 4);
ters. For example, changing the type of units (tem-
• Control Output x (1A, 1B, 2A or 2B); perature, relative humidity, etc.) will affect settings
• Alarm Output x (1 or 2); that assume either Reset or Rate and Integral or
• Retransmit Output x (1 or 2); Derivative. Changing from the Celsius to the
• Digital Output x (1 to 8); and Fahrenheit scale will affect every parameter with a
• Communications numerical value in one or the other scale. In some
cases, a change in one parameter will affect the de-
3. Go to the Operations Page and tune or set the
faults of others.
PID sets.
4. Go to the Operations Page and set the alarm ✔ NOTE:
set points.
Changes to some parameters will affect other parameters.
5. Go to the Profiles Page to program the profiles.
Customizing the Main Page Choose P:1 Display__

>None
Up to 16 lines can be added to the Main Page to
Input 1 Value 30°C ■
display status and information from the controller.
Input 2 Value 76% ▼
Go to the Setup Main Page menu on the Setup
Page. The first screen will prompt you to choose SP 26°C
one of the 16 lines to customize. "P1 Parameter" is
TargetSP1 30°C
the first line; "P16 Parameter" is the 16th. After
SP2 10%
choosing this line by pressing . , select a parame-
TargetSP2 100%
ter to monitor. Your choices are:
• None • Active Ch1 PID Set Input1 26°C
• Input 1 Value • Active Ch2 PID Set Input2 4%
• Input 2 Value • Last Jump Step Input3 20°C
• Input 3 Value • Jump Count PROFILE_2 Waiting
Step 2 Ramp Time
• Set Point 1 • WaitFor Status
Wait A_2_4 D1_34
• Set Point 2 • Step Type Remain 00:00:00
• % Power 1 • Target SP1 Jump Step 0_0
• % Power 2 • Target SP2 Jump Count 0
• Tune Status 1 • Inner Set Point Ch1 PID Set 1
• Tune Status 2 • Custom Message 1 Ch2 PID Set 3
Power1 0%
• Time • Custom Message 2
Power2 55%
• Date • Custom Message 3 Digital In _234
• Digital Ins* • Custom Message 4 Digital Out _2_4_678
• Digital Outs* • Input 1 Cal. Offset Time 14:15:30
• Time Remaining • Input 2 Cal. Offset Date 10/7/99
• Current File • Input 3 Cal. Offset
Figure 2 — Example Parameters on the Custom Main
• Current Step
Page.
* When a digital input or output is active, its number will
appear in the Main Page display; when it is inactive, its ✔ NOTE:
position will be underlined. For defaults, see the Keys, Displays and Navigation
When a Wait for condition is still pending, its number Chapter.
will appear in the Main Page display; when it is no
longer being awaited, it will be underlined.
5.2 ■ Setup Watlow Series F4S/D

Custom Main Page Parameter Record
Name ___________________________________________ Date ______________________________
Main Page
Will always appear if active: Input 1 Error
Input 2 Error
Input 3 Error
Will appear if active and Alarm 1 Condition
set up to appear: Alarm 2 Condition
Autotuning Channel 1
Autotuning Channel 2
(Position on Main Page) (Possible parameters)

Choose from the column at P1 ____________________ None
the far right the information P2 ____________________ Input 1 Value
you want to appear on the P3 ____________________ Input 2 Value
Main Page (in any order): P4 ____________________ Input 3 Value
P5 ____________________ Set Point 1
P6 ____________________ Set Point 2
P7 ____________________ % Power 1
P8 ____________________ % Power 2
P9 ____________________ Tune status 1
P10 ____________________ Tune status 2
P11 ____________________ Time
P12 ____________________ Date
P13 ____________________ Digital Inputs
P14 ____________________ Digital Outputs
P15 ____________________ Time Remaining
P16 ____________________ Current File
Current Step
Active Ch1 PID Set
Active Ch2 PID Set
Last Jump Step
Jump Count
WaitFor Status
Step Type
Target SP1
Target SP2
Inner Set Point
Custom Message 1
Custom Message 2
Custom Message 3
Custom Message 4
Input1 Cal. Offset
Input2 Cal. Offset
Input3 Cal. Offset
Will always appear: Go to Operations

Go to Profiles
Go to Setup
Go to Factory

Sample Application:
Setup for Environmental Testing
F4
Analog Input 1
1A
1B
2A
2B
Main Page___________ 1
Go to Profiles
Go to Setup 2
Go to Factory
For greatest accuracy in measuring the chamber temperature, a re-

sistance temperature detection (RTD) sensor has been wired to ana-
log input 1. Andy wanted to measure tenths of degrees Fahrenheit,
with an alarm that would clear by itself if the temperature exceed-
ed or fell below the active alarm set point band. Alarm set points
are determined in the Operations Page.
Sensor: RTD Set Point High: 450.0°F

Type: DIN No Calibration Offset
Decimal Point: 0.0 0-second Filter
Set Point Low: 32.0°F Self-Clearing Error
Retransmit Output 1 Control Output x

To track the temperature of the (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B)
equipment inside the chamber,
Andy configured a retransmit out- Next, he scrolled back up to
put to match input 3. He scrolled set the control outputs con-
Before programming the profile down the list of inputs and outputs trolling heat and humidity.
to run the temperature and hu- on the Setup Page and found Re- For the fastest possible
midity tests in the environmen- transmit Output. He chose 50ºF switching rate, tighter control
tal chamber, Andy had to con- and 150ºF, respectively, for the and longer heater life, he se-
figure the controller to suit the Scale Low and Scale High; the lected Burst Fire control for
equipment and the test. smaller the range, the higher the each of them, designating 1A
resolution on the chart. and 1B as heat/cool outputs,
and 2A and 2B as
He went to the Setup Page, Source: Input 3 humidify/de-humidify outputs.
System Menu, and established Current: 4-20mA
the global system parameters, Scale Low: 50°F
including the real-time clock, Scale High: 150°F
the date and the PID units. Scale Offset: 0°F
Then he continued through the
list of inputs and outputs, con-
figuring each and keeping
notes about his settings on the Digital Output 7
User Setup Chart.
Digital output 7 was wired to an SSR (solid-state relay) that switch-
ed a solenoid valve controlling the flow of liquid nitrogen used for
To enter, press the Right cooling.
Key. .
Name: Default
Function: Boost cool
To exit, press the Left Key Boost Power Level: -90%
repeatedly. , Boost Delay: 20 seconds
Use a copy of the chart at

the end of this chapter to
record your settings.

Analog Input 2 Analog Input 3
The humidity sensor on analog input 2 was a process sensor using a 4 to A thermocouple (type J) sensor
20 mA signal, so Andy set the high end of the scale (20mA) for 100% and was adequate to measure the
the low (4mA) for 0% relative humidity (rh). Knowing that process sensor temperature of the equipment
displays are sometimes jumpy, he put a 1-second filter on it to stabilize it. itself (analog input 3). The other
settings remained the same as
Sensor: Process Set Point Low: 10% analog input 1.
Type: Vaisala Set Point High: 90%
Units: % RH No Calibration Offset Sensor: Thermocouple
Scale Low: 0% 1-second Filter Type: J
Scale High: 100% Self-clearing Error Decimal Point: Whole numbers
only
Alarms Digital Inputs Digital Output 6

He assigned an alarm output Then he set up the digital inputs for For heating and cooling capacity
to indicate a temperature de- remote functions. Digital input 1 and to accommodate the com-
viation on input 1, which would be wired to a key-lock switch pressor, Andy assigned these
would monitor chamber tem- that requires the operator to have a functions to Digital outputs 6, 7
perature, and gave it a name key to operate the controller and and 8.
that would state the problem. chamber. Digital input 2 would be
wired to a door switch to stop the pro- Digital output 6, wired to a big
Name: TEMP DEV file if the chamber door opens. auxiliary heater, was set up to
kick in only when the main
Type: Deviation
Digital Input 1 heater worked at greater than
Source: Input 1
Name: KEYLOCK 90% power (boost power level)
Latch: Yes
for more than 20 seconds (boost
Silencing: Self-clear Function: Panel lock
delay).
Alarm Hysteresis: 1, 1.0 Condition: Start on high
Sides: Both
Name: BOOST HEAT
Condition: Close on alarm Digital Input 2
Function: Boost heat
Show: Yes Name: Default
Boost Power Level: 90%
Function: Pause
Boost Delay: 20 seconds
Condition: High
Digital Output 8
Andy set the compressor control parameter to have the There was no computer connection, so Andy skipped
compressor run only when cooling is needed. Communications.
% on Power: 0% Then he left the Setup Page and went to the Factory
% off Power: 9% Page where he put a password lock on the Setup Page,
Off Delay: 30 seconds Profile Page and Factory Page.
On Delay: 60 seconds Finally, he went to the Operations Page and set the ac-
tive alarm band:
-20°F
+20°F

Setup Page Map Alarm Output x (1 and 2)
Name
Alarm Type
System Alarm Source
Guar. Soak Band1 Latching
Guar. Soak Band2 Silencing
Current Time Alarm Hysteresis
Current Date Alarm Sides
PID Units Alarm Logic
°F or °C Alarm Messages
Show °F or °C Retransmit Output x (1 and 2)
Ch1 Autotune SP Retransmit Source
Ch2 Autotune SP Analog Range
Input 1 Fail Low Scale
Input 2 Fail High Scale
Open Loop Ch1 Scale Offset
Open Loop Ch2 Digital Output x (1 to 8)
Power-Out Time Name
Power-Out Action Function
Analog Input x (1 to 3) Off
Sensor Event Output
Type Complementary Output
Units (Output 5 only)
Decimal Control Output
Scale Low Boost Heat (Output 6 only)
Scale High Boost %Power
Choose Scaling Boost Delay Time
Ch2 Output Disable? Boost Cool (Output 7 only)
Enter In1 Temp Low Boost %Power
Enter In1 Temp High Boost Delay Time
SP Low Limit Compressor (Output 8 only)
SP High Limit Compressor On %Power
Calibration Offset Compressor Off %Power
Filter Time Compressor On Delay
Error Latch Compressor Off Delay
Cascade Communications
Digital Input x (1 to 4) Baud Rate
Name Address
Function Custom Main Page
Condition Px (Parameter 1 to 16)
Control Output x (1A, 1B, 2A or Process Display
2B) Input 1 only
Function Alternating Display
Cycle Time IN1 Display Time
Process IN2 Display Time
Hi Power Limit IN3 Display Time
Lo Power Limit Static Message
Message 1 to 4

Setup Page Parameter Table Modbus
Register
Parameter Description (Modbus Value) Default (I/O, Set, Ch) Parameters to Appear
System
Main > Setup > System
Guarantee Soak Band Decimal choice 1 Band Active: Always (1).
x (1 or 2) dependent: 1205 [1] Active if controller is Dual Chan-
1 to 30000, or 1212 [2] nel (2).
Select value above r/w
.1 to 3000.0, or
and below set point .01 to 300.0, or
to define the soak .001 to 30.0
band. (1 to 30000)
Current Time hh:mm:ss current time Time Active: Always.
00:00:00 to 23:59:59 1916 [hh]
Enter actual time. 1917 [mm]
[hh] (0 to 23)
(24-hour-clock) 1918 [ss]
[mm] (0 to 59)
[ss] (0 to 59) r/w
Current Date M/D/Y current date Time Active: Always.

01/01/1998 to 1919 [mm]
Enter actual date. 1920 [dd]
12/31/2035
[mm] (1 to 12) 1921 [yy]
[dd] (1 to 31) r/w
[yy] (1998 to 2035)
PID Units U S (Reset/Rate) (0) U S (Reset/ 900 r/w Active: Always.
Choose units for PID SI (Integral/Derivative) Rate) (0)
control. (1)
°F or °C °F (0) °F (0) 901 r/w Active: Always.

Choose temperature °C (1)
scale.
Show °F or °C No, Upper Display (0) Yes, Upper 1923 r/w Active: Always.
Choose whether to Yes, Upper Display (1) Display (1)
display or hide °C or
°F in top display.
Channel x Autotune Set 50 to 150% (50 to 150) 90% (90) Point Active: Always (1).
Point (1 or 2) 304 [1] Active if controller is Dual
323 [2] Channel (2).
Set percent of set r/w
point to auto-tune to.
Input x Fail (1 or 2) 0 to 100% Heat only 0% (0) Fail Active: Always (1).
Enter percent of 0 to 100% Cool only 903 [1] Active if controller is Dual
power supplied to -100% to +100% 906 [2] Channel (2).
Cool/Heat or r/w
the output if analog
input sensor fails. Heat/Cool
Open Loop Channel x (1 or 2) Off (0) Off (0) Channel –

On (1) 904 [1]
Select whether to
907 [2]
turn off outputs and
r/w
display an error
message.
Power-Out Time 0 to 30000 seconds 10 seconds 1213 r/w –
Define a power out- (0 to 30000) (10)
age in seconds.
Power-Out Action Continue (0) Continue (0) 1206 r/w Active: Always.
Choose controller re- Hold (1)
Terminate (2)
sponse to power out-
Reset (3)
age while running a Idle Set Point 1 (4)
profile. Idle Set Point 2 (5)
✔ NOTE:
For more information about how parameter settings affect the con-
troller’s operation, see the Features Chapter.

Register
Parameter Description (Modbus Value) Default (I/O,
[I/O, Set, Ch)
Ch] Parameters to Appear
Main > Setup > Analog Input x (1 to 3)
Sensor Thermocouple (0) Thermo- Input Active: Always.
RTD (1) couple (0) 600 [1]
Select the sensor. 610 [2]
Process (2)
620 [3]
Wet Bulb-Dry Bulb* (3)
r/w
Off (4)
Type If Sensor is set to J (0) Input Active: Always.
thermocouple: 601 [1]
Select the lineariza- 611 [2]
tion table to apply J (0)
621 [3]
to the sensor. K (1)
T (2)
E (3)
r/w
ç
N (4) CAUTION: Changes to
C (5) Sensor, Type, Units,
D (6) Decimals, Scales and Set
PT2 (7) Point Limits will delete all
R (8) profiles stored in the F4’s
S (9)
memory.
B (10)
If Sensor is set to RTD 100Ω DIN
or Wet/Dry Bulb: (11) for The tenth character of your
100Ω DIN (11) 100Ω RTD model number determines
100Ω JIS (12) models
your RTD base resistance.
500Ω DIN (23
500Ω JIS (24)) 500Ω DIN F4_ _-_ _ _ _-_ (1 to 4) R G
1kΩ DIN (25) (23) for for 100Ω
1kΩ JIS (26) 500Ω or
F4_ _-_ _ _ _-_ (5 to 8) R G
If Sensor is set to 1kΩ models
Process:
for 500Ω and 1kΩ
4 to 20mA (13) 4 to 20mA
0 to 20mA (14) (13)
0 to 5V (15)
1 to 5V (16)
0 to 10V (17)
0 to 50mV (18)
If Analog Input 2 Sen-
sor is set to Process
and Analog Input 2 is
selected:
•Vaisala 0 to 5V** (19)
•Vaisala 0 to 10V (20)
•Vaisala 0 to 20mA**
(21)
•Rotronics 0 to 5V***
(22)
* A wet bulb at input 2 uses the input 1 value to calculate the rel- humidity display in the Main Page will display “RH Disabled”
ative humidity on channel 2. The humidify and dehumidify out- for a low temperature error and “RH Disabled” for a high temper-
puts (2A and 2B) are disabled when the input 1 temperature is too ature error.
low (32°F [0°C]) or too high (212°F [100°C]). The relative humidi-
ty display in the Main Page will display “RH Disabled” for a low *** The Series F4 provides temperature compensation for the
temperature error and “RH Disabled” for a high temperature error. Rotronics Model H260 Capacitive Relative Humidity Sensor to
calculate relative humidity on channel 2. The humidify and de-
** The Series F4 provides temperature compensation for the humidify outputs (2A and 2B) are disabled when the input 1
Vaisala HMM-30C Solid-state Humidity Sensor to calculate rela- temperature is too low (-5°F [-20°C]) or too high (320°F [160°C]).
tive humidity on channel 2. The humidify and dehumidify out- The relative humidity display in the Main Page will display “RH
puts (2A and 2B) are disabled when the input 1 temperature is Disabled” for a low temperature error and “RH Disabled” for a
too low (-40°F [-40°C]) or too high (320°F [160°C]). The relative high temperature error.

Register
Altitude 0 to 2499 ft (0) 0 to 2499 ft 1902 r/w Active if Analog Input 2 Type is
Select an elevation 2500 to 4999 ft (1) (0) Wet Bulb-Dry Bulb.
to compensate for 5000 ft and above (2)
wet bulb evapora-
tion rates.
Units Temperature (0) Temperature Input Active if Sensor Type is set to
%rh (1) (0) 608 [1] Process.
Select the units of 618 [2]
measure for the psi (2)
628 [3]
input. units (3) r/w
Decimal 0 (0) 0 (0) Input Active if Sensor Type is set to
0.0 (1) 606 [1] Process.
Set the decimal 616 [2]
point for input. 0.00 process (2)
626 [3]
0.000 process (3)
r/w
Scale Low Depends on sensor and — Input Active if Sensor Type is set to
decimal point selec- 680 [1] Process.
Set unit value for 682 [2]
low end of current or tion.
684 [3]
voltage range. r/w
Scale High Depends on sensor and — Input Active if Sensor Type is set to
decimal point selec- 681 [1] Process.
Set unit value for 683 [2]
high end of current tion.
685 [3]
or voltage range. r/w
Choose Scaling Normal Scaling (0) Normal (0) Input Active if Sensor Type is set to
Scale Inversion (1) 693 [1] Process.
Select normal or in- 694 [2]
verse scaling. (Scale High corre-
695 [3]
sponds to the lowest
r/w
process value, and
Scale Low corre-
sponds to the highest
process value.)
Ch2 Output Disable? No (0) No (0) 696 r/w Active if Analog Input 2, Sensor
Disables Channel 2 Yes (1) is set to Process and Units is
outside the range set to %rh and Analog Input 1,
defined by Enter In1 Units is set to Temperature.
Temp Low and
Enter In1 Temp
High.
Enter In1 Temp Low Sensor range low to — 697 r/w Active if Ch2 Output Disable is
Choose the lowest In1 Temp High - 1 set to Yes.
temperature at
which the channel 2
output is active.
Enter In1 Temp High Sensor range high to — 698 r/w Active if Ch2 Output Disable is
Choose the highest In1 Temp Low + 1 set to Yes.
temperature at
which the channel 2
output is active.
Set Point Low Limit Depends on sensor. — Input Active: Always, except when Cas-
602 [1] cade is set to Process Cascade
Set limit for mini- 612 [2]
mum set point. or Deviation Cascade this is
622 [3]
masked for Analog Input 1.
r/w
✔ NOTE:

Register
[I/O, Set, Ch)
Set Point High Limit Depends on sensor. — Input Active: Always, except when Cas-
603 [1] cade is set to Process Cascade
Set limit for maxi- 613 [2]
mum set point. or Deviation Cascade this is
623 [3]
masked for Analog Input 1.
r/w
Calibration Offset -19999 to 30000 0 Input Active: Always.
605 [1]
Compensate for sen- 615 [2]
sor errors or other 625 [3]
factors. r/w
Filter Time -60.0 to 60.0 0.0 (0) Input Active: Always.
(-600 to 600) 1.0 if Decimal 604 [1]
Set the filter time 614 [2]
for input in seconds. is set to 0.0
and Sensor 624 [3]
r/w
Type is set
to Thermo-
couple or
RTD. (10)
Error Latch Self Clear (0) Self Clear (0) Input Active: Always.
607 [1]
Select whether error Latch (1) 617 [2]
clear is automatic or 627 [3]
manual. r/w
Cascade No Cascade (0) No Cascade 1925 r/w Active if Analog Input 3 is not set
Select whether to Process Cascade (1) (0) to Off (variable selection only).
use the cascade Deviation Cascade (2)
algorithm.
Cascade Low Range, Depends on sensor and — 1926 r/w Active if Input 3 is not set to off
Process decimal point selec- and Process Cascade is selected.
tion.
Cascade High Range, Depends on sensor and — 1927 r/w Active if Input 3 is not set to off
Process decimal point selec- and Process Cascade is selected.
tion.
Cascade Low Range, Depends on sensor and — 1926 r/w Active if Input 3 is not set to off
Deviation decimal point selec- and Deviation Cascade is
tion. selected.
Cascade High Range, Depends on sensor and — 1927 r/w Active if Input 3 is not set to off
Deviation decimal point selec- and Deviation Cascade is
tion. selected.
Digital Input x (1 to 4)
Main > Setup > Digital Input x (1 to 4)
Name <selected by user> DIGIT IN1 3000-3009 Active: Always.
(ASCII Values) 3010-3019
Name the input for 3020-3029
easy reference. 3030-3039
r/w
✔ NOTE:
Press the Information Key ˆ for more task-related tips.

Register
Function Off (0) Off (0) Input Active: Always.

Panel Lock (1) 1060 [1] While a profile is running, the
Select the digital 1062 [2]
input function. Reset Alarm (2) controller will not recognize
1064 [3]
Control Outputs Off (3) digital inputs that are pro-
1066 [4]
All Outputs Off (4) r/w
grammed to start a profile.
Digital Outputs Off (5)
Start Profile (6)* Only one profile can be run at a
Pause Profile (7) time.
Resume Profile (8)
Terminate Profile (9) * This prompt only appears if the
Wait for Event (10) F4 memory contains a profile.
Condition Low (0) Low (0) Input Active: Always.

High (1) 1061 [1] Digital inputs are edge trig-
Select the condition 1063 [2]
to trigger digital gered and require a transition
1065 [3]
input. from high to low or low to high.
1067 [4]
r/w
Control Output x (1A,1B, 2A and 2B)
Main > Setup > Control Output x (1A,1B, 2A and 2B)
Function Off (0) Heat (1A and Output Active if Analog Inputs 1 and 2
Heat (1) 2A) (1) 700 [1A] are enabled.
Select type of func- 717 [1B]
Cool (2) Off (1B, 2B)
tion for output. 734 [2A]
(0)
751 [2B]
r/w
Choose Cycle Time Variable Burst (0) Output Active always.
Fixed Time (1) 509 [1A]
Enter the value of 559 [1B]
the variable burst 2509 [2A]
cycle time. 2559 [2B]
r/w
Enter Cycle Time .1 to 60 Fixed Time Output Active if the selected output is
(1 to 600) 1.0 sec. (10) 506 [1A] not Process and Burst is set to
Select the duration 556 [1B]
of cycle. No.
2506 [2A]
2556 [2B]
r/w
Process 4 to 20mA (0) 4 to 20mA (0) Output Active if the selected output is
0 to 20mA (1) 701 [1A] set to a process output.
Set process output 718 [1B]
type. 0 to 5V (2)
735 [2A]
1 to 5V (3)
752 [2B]
0 to 10V (4) r/w
High Power Limit Low Limit +1 to 100% 100% (100) Output Active: Always.
(Low Limit +1 to 100) 714 [1A]
Set high limit con-
731 [1B]
trol (PID mode only) 748 [2A]
output power level. 765 [2B]
r/w
Low Power Limit 0% to High Limit -1 0% (0) Output Active: Always.
715 [1A]
Set low limit control (0 to High Limit -1) 732 [1B]
(PID mode only) 749 [2A]
output power level. 766 [2B]
r/w
✔ NOTE:

Register
[I/O, Set, Ch)
Alarm Output x (1 and 2)

Main > Setup > Alarm Output x (1 and 2)
Name <selected by user> ALARMX 3200-3209 Active always.
Name the alarm for (ASCII Values) 3210-3219
easy reference. r/w
Alarm Type Off (0) Off (0) Output Active always.
Process (1) 702 [1]
Select the alarm 719 [2]
type. Deviation (2)
r/w
Alarm Source Input 1 (0) Off (0) Output Active if the source is
Input 2 (1) 716 [1] enabled.
source. Input 3 (2)
r/w
Latching Alarm Self-Clears (0) Alarm Self- Output Active if Alarm Output is
Alarm Latches (1) Clears (0) 704 [1] enabled.
Choose automatic or 721 [2]
manual clearing of r/w
alarms.
Silencing No (0) No (0) Output Active if Alarm Output is
Yes (1) 705 [1] enabled.
Choose whether to
722 [2]
mask alarms on
r/w
power-up.
Alarm Hysteresis 1 to 30000 3 (3) Output Active if Alarm Output is
(1 to 30000) 703 [1] enabled.
Set the alarm 720 [2]
hysteresis. r/w
Alarm Sides Both (0) Both (0) Output Active if Alarm Output is
Low (1) 706 [1] enabled.
Choose to enable
High (2) 723 [2]
Low, High or both
r/w
alarm set points.
Alarm Logic Open on Alarm (0) Open on Output Active if Alarm Output is
Close on Alarm (1) Alarm (0) 707 [1] enabled.
Select the alarm
724 [2]
logic option.
Alarm Messages Yes on Main Page (0) Yes on Main Output Active if Alarm Output is en-
No (1) Page (0) 708 [1] abled.
message option. r/w
Retransmit Output x (1 and 2)

Main > Setup > Retransmit Output x (1 and 2)
Retransmit Source Input 1 (0) Input 1 (0) Output Active: Always. (Values appear
Input 2 (1) 709 [1] only if the source is enabled.)
Choose a source for 726 [2]
Input 3 (2)
retransmit signal. r/w
Set Point 1 (3)
Set Point 2 (4)
Channel 1 Power (5)
Channel 2 Power (6)
Analog Range 4 to 20mA (0) 4 to 20mA (0) Output Active: Always.
0 to 20mA (1) 836 [1]
Select voltage or 837 [2]
0 to 5V (2)
current range to r/w
1 to 5V (3)
retransmit. 0 to 10V (4)
Low Scale -19999 to high scale -1 Low end of Output Active: Always.
(minimum sensor sensor 710 [1]
Set low end of cur-
range) (-19999 to range 727 [2]
rent or voltage
r/w
range to retransmit. High Scale -1)
✔ NOTE:

Register
High Scale Low Scale +1 to 30000 High end of Output Active: Always.
711 [1]
Set high end of cur- (maximum sensor sensor
range) (Low Scale +1 range 728 [2]
rent or voltage
r/w
range to retransmit. to 30000)
Scale Offset -19999 to 30000 0 (0) Output Active: Always.
Range Low to Range 712 [1]
Shift the scale up
High 729 [2]
(+) or down (-) to
r/w
agree with source (-19999 to 30000)
signal.
Digital Output x (1 to 8)
Main > Setup > Digital Output x (1 to 8)
Name <selected by user> DIGIT OUTX 3100-3109 Active: Always.
(ASCII Values) 3110-3119
Name the digital 3120-3129
output for easy ref- 3130-3139
3140-3149
erence. 3150-3159
3160-3169
3170-3179
r/w
Function Off (0) Off (0) 2001 [1] Active: Always.
Event Output (1) 2011 [2]
Choose a function
Complementary Output 2021 [3]
for each digital out- (Digital 5) (2) 2031 [4]
put. *Control Output 1A 2041 [5] *Active if the selected output is not
*Control Output 1B 2051 [6] Process.
*Control Output 2A 2061 [7]
*Control Output 2B 2071 [8]
**Boost Heat (Digital 6) r/w
**Operates based on Channel 1
(3) power requirements.
**Boost Cool (Digital 7)
(4)
**Compressor (Digital
8) (5)
Boost Percent Power 0% to 100% for Heat Heat 100% Output Active if Digital 6 or 7 Function
2052 [6] is set to Boost Heat or Boost
Enable boost above -100% to 0% for Cool (100) 2062 [7]
chosen power level. Cool -100% (- r/w Cool.
100)
Boost Time Delay 0 to 9999 seconds 30 seconds Output Active if Digital 6 or 7 Function
(0 to 9999) (30) 2054 [6] is set to Boost Heat or Boost
Set time to delay 2064 [7]
boost. r/w Cool.
ç
WARNING: Provide a labeled switch or circuit breaker near peripheral equipment per-
manently connected to the Series F4 digital outputs as the means of disconnection for
servicing. Failure to do so could result in damage to equipment and/or property,
and/or injury or death to personnel.
✔ NOTE:

Register
Compressor On % Power -100% to 100% 0% (0) 2072 r/w Active if Digital 8 Function is
The compressor will (-100 to 100) Compressor.
be on below this
chosen power level.
Compressor Off % Power Compressor on % Compressor 2073 r/w Active if Digital 8 Function is
The compressor will power to 100% on % power Compressor.
be off above this
chosen power level.
Compressor Off Delay 0 to 9999 seconds 10 seconds 2075 r/w Active if Digital 8 Function is
Set time to delay (0 to 9999) (10) Compressor.
compressor turn-off.
Compressor On Delay 1 to 9999 seconds 30 seconds 2074 r/w Active if Digital 8 Function is
Set time to delay (1 to 9999) (30) Compressor.
compressor turn-on.
ç
WARNING: Provide a labeled switch or circuit breaker near peripheral equipment per-
manently connected to the Series F4 digital outputs as the means of disconnection for
servicing. Failure to do so could result in damage to equipment and/or property,
and/or injury or death to personnel.
Communications
Main > Setup > Communications
Baud Rate 19200 (0) 19200 Not Active: Always.
Select transmission 9600 (1) available
speed.
Address 1 to 247 (1 to 247) 1 Not Active: Always.
Select address for available
controller.
✔ NOTE:

Register
Custom Main Page

Main > Setup > Custom Main Page
P x (1 to 16) None (0) [1] Current Par. Active: Always.
Input 1 Value (1) File (15) 1400 [1]
Choose parameters
Input 2 Value (2) [2] Current 1401 [2]
to appear on Main Input 3 Value (3) Step (16) 1402 [3]
Page. Set Point 1 (4) [3] Input 2 1403 [4]
Set Point 2 (5) Value (2) 1404 [5]
% Power 1 (6) [4] Set Point 1 1405 [6]
% Power 2 (7) (4) 1406 [7]
Tune status 1 (8) [5] Set Point 2 1407 [8]
Tune status 2 (9) (5) 1408 [9]
Time (10) [6] Step Type
1409 [10]
Date (11) 1410 [11]
(22)
Digital Inputs (12) 1411 [12]
[7] Target SP1
Digital Outputs (13) 1412 [13]
Time Remaining (14) (23)
1413 [14]
Current File (15) [8] Target SP2 1414 [15]
Current Step (16) (24) 1415 [16]
Active Ch1 PID Set(17) [9] WaitFor r/w
Active Ch2 PID Set(18) Status (21)
Last Jump Step (19) [10] Time Re-
Jump Count (20) maining (14)
WaitFor Status (21) [11] Digital In-
Step Type (22) puts (12)
Target SP1 (23) [12] Digital
Target SP2 (24) Outputs (13)
Inner Set Point (25) [13] % Power 1
Custom Message 1 (26) (6)
Custom Message 2 (27) [14] % Power 2
Custom Message 3 (28) (7)
Custom Message 4 (29) [15] Date (11)
Input1 Cal. Offset (30) [16] Time (10)
Input2 Cal. Offset (31)
Input3 Cal. Offset (32)
Process Display
Main > Setup > Process Display
Input 1 Only Input 1 (0) Input 1 (0) 5500 Active: Always.
Alternating (1)
Alternating Display Input 1 Display Time (0 5501 [1] Active if Inputs 2 and/or 3 are
to 999) 5502 [2] active.
Input 2 Display Time (0 5503 [3]
to 999)
Input 3 Display Time (0
to 999)
Static Message
Main > Setup > Static Message
Message 1 to 4 <selected by user> Message X 4501-4518[1] Active: Always.
(ASCII Values) 4521-4538[2]
4541-4558[3]
4561-4578[4]
✔ NOTE:

Setup Page Parameter Record
Name ___________________________________________
Setup Page Date ______________________________
System Menu Setting
Guar. Soak Band 1
Guar. Soak Band 2
Current Time
Current Date
PID Units
F or C
Show F or C
Ch1 Autotune SP
Ch2 Autotune SP
Input 1 Fail
Input 2 Fail
Open Loop Ch1
Open Loop Ch2
Power-Out Time
Power-Out Action
Input Menu Analog In 1 Analog In 2 Analog In 3 Digital In 1 Digital In 2 Digital In 3 Digital In 4
Sensor
Type
Decimal
Altitude
Units
Scale Low
Scale High
Choose Scaling
Ch2 Output Disable?
Enter In1 Temp Low
Enter In1 Temp High
SP Low Limit
SP High Limit
Calibration Offset
Filter Time
Error Latch
Cascade
Name
Function
Condition
Control Output Menu Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Retrans 1 Retrans 2
Function
Cycle Time
Process Type
Hi Power Limit
Lo Power Limit
Alarm Name
Alarm Type
Alarm Source
Latching
Silencing
Alarm Hysteresis
Alarm Sides
Alarm Logic
Alarm Messages
Retransmit Source
Analog Range
Low Scale
High Scale
Scale Offset
Digital Output Menu Digit Out 1 Digit Out 2 Digit Out 3 Digit Out 4 Digit Out 5 Digit Out 6 Digit Out 7 Digit Out 8
Name
Function
Boost % Power
Boost Delay
Compressor On % Power
ower
Compressor Of
Off
f % Power
ower
Compressor On Delay
Compressor Off Delay
Communications Menu Setting
Baud Rate
Address

6
Chapter Six: Features
Inputs
Calibration Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2
Filter Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2
Set Point Low Limit and High Limit . . . . . . . . . .6.3
High Scale and Low Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3
Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3
Retransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3
Control Methods
On-Off Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4
Proportional Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4
PI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5
PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5
Dead Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5
Multiple PID Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6
Burst Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6
Other Features
Autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7
Power-Out Time/Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7
Alarms
Alarm Set Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8
Alarm Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8
Process or Deviation Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8
Alarm Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9
Alarm Silencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9
Alarm Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9
Advanced Features
Boost Heat and Boost Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10
Compressor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10
Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11
Watlow Series F4S/D Features ■ 6.1

Inputs/Outputs
Calibration Offset The negative calibration offset will
compensate for the difference
Temperature Reading
Calibration offset allows a device to compensate for from Sensor
between the sensor reading and
the actual temperature.
an inaccurate sensor, lead resistance or other fac-
tors that affect the input value. A positive offset in-
creases the input value, and a negative offset de-
Temperature
creases the input value.
You can view or change the offset value of inputs 1,
Actual Process Temperature
2 or 3 with the Calibration Offset parameter.
Location in software: Setup Page > Analog Input x
(1 to 3).
Time
Figure 6.2a — Calibration Offset.
Filter Time Constant

A time filter smooths an input signal by applying a Unfiltered Input Signal
first-order filter time constant to the signal. Either
the displayed value or both the displayed and con-
Temperature
trol values can be filtered. Filtering the displayed

value makes it easier to monitor. Filtering the sig-
nal may improve the performance of PID control in
a noisy or very dynamic system.
A positive value affects only the viewed values. A Time
negative value affects both the viewed and control
values.
Location in software: Setup Page > Analog Inputs x Filtered Input Signal
(1 to 3).
Temperature
Time
Figure 6.2b — Filtered and Unfiltered Input Signals.
Open Loop Detect

Open loop checks the integrity of the control loop, consisting of the controller output, power control, heater
and sensor.
If the output power is at its maximum for a period of time equal to the reset time and the input has not
changed at least ± 5°F, the controller will switch to Manual Mode at 0% output power. The upper screen will
display [oPLP`] and the lower screen will display “Open Loop.”
To clear an open loop error, after correcting the problem that caused it, turn the controller off then back on.
Location in software: Setup Page > System.
6.2 ■ Features Watlow Series F4S/D

Set Point Low Limit and High Limit
The controller constrains the set point to a value High Limit of selected Sensor Range
between a low limit and a high limit. The high lim-

it cannot be set higher than the sensor high limit SP High Limit Range (between High Limit of Sensor and SP Low Limit)
or lower than the low limit. The low limit cannot be

SP High Limit
set lower than the sensor low limit or higher than
Temperature
the high limit. Set Point Range (must be between SP Low Limit and SP High Limit)
You can view or change the input low limit (SP Low SP Low Limit
Limit) and the input high limit (SP High Limit) for
analog inputs 1, 2 or 3. SP Low Limit Range (between Low Limit of Sensor and SP High Limit)
Location in software: Setup Page > Analog Input x

Low Limit of selected Sensor Range
(1 to 3).
Figure 6.3a — Sensor Ranges.
High Scale and Low Scale

When an analog input is selected as a process in-
put, you must choose a value to represent the low
and high ends of the current or voltage range. For
example, if an analog input with a process sensor
type 4 to 20mA is selected and the units are % Rel-
ative Humidity, then 0% could represent 4mA and
100% could represent 20mA. The set point will be
limited to the range between scale low and scale
high.
Location in software: Setup Page > Retransmit
Output x (1 or 2).
Event
With an event input an operator can perform cer-
tain operations on a system by opening or closing a
switch or applying a dc logic signal to the con-
troller. This feature can add convenience, safety or
security to a system.
In the Series F4, digital inputs 1 to 4 can be as-
signed as wait for events, as well as other process
control features.
Location in software: Setup Page > Digital Input x
(1 to 4) Condition.
Retransmit
Retransmit outputs 1 and 2 can retransmit an ana-
log signal to serve as an input variable for another
device. The signal may serve as a remote set point
for another controller or as input for a chart
recorder to document system performance over
time.
Location in software: Setup Page.

Control Methods
On-Off Control
The heating action switches off when the process
On-off control switches the output either full on or temperature rises above the set point.
full off, depending on the input, set point and hys-

teresis values. The hysteresis value indicates the
Temperature
Set Point
amount the process value must deviate from the set
point to turn on the output. Increasing the value de- Hysteresis
creases the number of times the output will cycle. Process Temperature
Decreasing hysteresis improves controllability. With
hysteresis set to 0 the process value would stay clos- The heating action switches on when the process temperature
drops below the set point minus the hysteresis.
The heating action
er to the set point, but the output would switch on switches on at startup.
and off more frequently, causing “chattering.” Time
Set the proportional band to 0 to set the controller

to on-off control mode. The cooling action
The cooling action switches on when
the process temperature rises above
switches
Proportional Band x (A or B) location in software: on at startup.
the set point plus the hysteresis.
Operations Page > Edit PID > PID Channel x (1 or

2) > PID Set x (1 to 5) or (6 or 10).
Temperature
Hysteresis
Process Temperature Set Point
Hysteresis x (A or B) location in software: Opera-
tions Page > Edit PID > PID Set Channel x (1 or 2)
> PID Set x (1 to 5) or (6 or 10).
The cooling action switches off when the process
temperature drops below the set point.
✔ NOTE:
Fail power does not function in on/off control mode.
Time
Figure 6.4a — On-off Control for Heating and Cooling.
Proportional Control
Set Point Overshoot
Some processes need to maintain a temperature or
process value closer to the set point than on-off con-
trol can provide. Proportional control provides clos-
er control by adjusting the output when the tem- Proportional Band Droop
perature or process value is within a proportional

Temperature
band. When the value is in the band, the controller

adjusts the output based on how close the process
value is to the set point; the closer to set point the
lower the output. This is similar to backing off on
the gas pedal of a car as you approach a stop sign.
It keeps the temperature or process value from
swinging as widely as it would with simple on-off
Time
control. However, when a system settles down, the
temperature or process value tends to “droop” short Figure 6.4b — Proportional Control.
of the set point.
With proportional control the output power level
equals (set point minus process value) divided by
propband.
Location in software: Operations Page > Edit PID >
PID Set Channel x (1 or 2) > PID Set x (1 to 5) or (6
to 10).

Proportional plus Integral (PI) Control
Set Point
The droop caused by proportional control (reset)
can be corrected by adding integral control. When Droop
the system settles down the integral value is tuned Proportional Band Droop corrected
to bring the temperature or process value closer to
the set point. Integral determines the speed of the
Temperature
correction, but this may increase the overshoot at
startup or when the set point is changed. Too much
integral action will make the system unstable. Inte-
gral is cleared when the process value is outside of
the proportional band.
Integral (if units are set to SI) is measured in min-
utes per repeat. A low integral value causes a fast Time
integrating action. Figure 6.5a — Proportional Plus Integral Control.

Reset rate (if units are set to U.S.) is measured in
repeats per minute. A high reset value causes a fast
integrating action.
PID Set Channel x (1 or 2) > PID Set x (1 to 5) or
(6 to 10).
Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Set Point

Reduced Overshoot
Control
Proportional Band
Use derivative rate control to minimize overshoot
in a PI-controlled system. Derivative adjusts the Proportional Band x 2
output based on the rate of change in the tempera-
ture or process value. Too much derivative will
Temperature
make the system sluggish. Heating slows

PID Set Channel x (1 or 2) > PID Set x (1 to 5) or (6
to 10).
Time
Figure 6.5b — PID Control.

Dead Band
In a multiple PID application the dead bands above
and below the set point can save an application's Cooling Proportional Band
energy and wear by maintaining process tempera- Cooling Set Point
ture within acceptable ranges. Shifting the effective Heating Set Point
Cooling Dead Band
cooling set point and heating set point keeps the

Temperature
two systems from fighting each other. Heating Proportional Band
Proportional action ceases when the process value

is within the dead band. Integral action continues
to bring the process temperature to the set point.
When the dead band value is zero, the heating ele-
ment activates when the temperature drops below
the set point, and the cooling element switches on Time
when the temperature exceeds the set point. Figure 6.5c — Cooling Dead Band.
Location in software: Operations Page > Edit PID
>PID Set Channel x (1 or 2) > PID Set x (1 to 5) or
6 to 10).

Multiple PID Sets
The Series F4 has five PID sets available for each Channel 1 (Heat/Cool) Channel 2 (Relative
channel, sets 1 to 5 for Channel 1 and sets 6 to 10 Output 1A Heat Humidity)
for Channel 2, allowing optimal performance under Output 1B Cool Output 2A Humidify
different conditions, loads and temperatures. In the PID Sets 1 to 5 Output 2B Dehumidify
Static Set Point mode, PID Set 1 is used for Chan- PropBand A PID Sets 6 to 10
nel 1 and PID Set 6 is used for Channel 2 control. Integral A PropBand A
When programming a profile, you can assign differ- Derivative A Integral A
ent sets to each Ramp step and Soak step. Dead Band A Derivative A
PropBand B Dead Band A
A PID set includes proportional, integral and
Integral B PropBand B
derivative settings for outputs A and B. It also in-
Derivative B Integral B
cludes dead band, as long as the proportional band
Dead Band B Derivative B
is not set to 0.
Dead Band B
PID Set Channel x (1 or 2) > PID Set x (1 to 5) or
(6 to 10).
Burst Fire
Burst firing provides even output power with the
lowest level of noise generation (RFI). Burst fire is 100% output
the preferred method for controlling a resistive
load, providing a very short time base for longer 10 ON, 0 OFF
heater life.
The controller determines when the ac sine wave
will cross the 0-volts point, then switches the load
on or off only at this point, minimizing RFI.
Location in software: Setup Page > Control Output
x (1 to 3).
50% output
1 ON, 1 OFF
66% output
2 ON, 1 OFF
Figure 6.6 — Burst Fire.

Other Features
Auto-tune begins Process Set Point Auto-tune is complete
Autotuning (on-off control). (PID control).
The autotuning feature allows the controller to

measure the system response to determine effective
settings for PID control. When autotuning is initi-
ated the controller reverts to on-off control. The
Auto-tune Set Point
temperature must cross the auto-tune set point (Default is 90% of process set point.)
four times to complete the autotuning process.
Temperature
Once complete, the controller controls at the nor-
mal set point, using the new parameters. The F4
stores the value in the PID set specified.
Location in software: Operations Page > Autotune
PID > Channel 1 Autotune > PID Set x (1 to 5) or
Channel 2 Autotune > PID Set x (6 to 10).
Time
Figure 6.7 — Autotuning.

ç
CAUTION: Choose an auto-tune set point value that will
protect your product from possible damage from overshoot
or undershoot during the autotuning oscillations. If the
product is sensitive, carefully select the auto-tune set ✔ NOTE:
point to prevent product damage. For manual tuning, see the Operations Chapter.
Power-Out Time/Power-Out Action

The Power-Out Time and Power-Out Action param-
eters direct the F4’s response to the interruption of
electrical power while running a profile. The F4’s
battery-powered real-time clock tracks the amount
of time the power is out. When power is restored,
the controller compares this amount of time to the
Power-Out Time setting and takes whatever action
is selected in the Power-Out Action setting.
First, determine how long the power can be inter-
rupted without adversely affecting results. Set the
Power-Out Time to this time. If power is returned
in less time than this setting, the profile will re-
sume running. (The profile run time stops while
the power is off.) If power is returned after a time
longer than this setting, the F4 will take action
based on the user-configured Power-Out Action pa-
rameter: Continue (resume the profile at the point
that power was interrupted); Hold (hold the profile
at the point that power was interrupted); Termi-
nate (stop the profile using the End step condi-
✔ NOTE:
tions); Reset (restart the profile from Step 1); Idle
(stop the profile and transfer to an idle setpoint). The Power Out Action occurs only if a profile was run-
ning when the power went out. If a profile was on hold, it
Location in software: Setup Page > System > Pow-
will return to its Hold status when the power returns.
er-Out Time > Power-Out Action.

Alarms
Alarms are activated when the process value or
temperature leaves a defined range. A user can
configure how and when an alarm is triggered,
what action it takes and whether it turns off auto-
matically when the alarm condition is over.
Configure alarm outputs in the Setup Page before
setting alarm set points.
Alarm Set Points

The alarm high set point defines the process value
or temperature that will trigger a high side alarm.
It must be higher than the alarm low set point and
lower than the high limit of the sensor range.
The alarm low set point defines the temperature
that will trigger a low side alarm. It must be lower
than the alarm high set point and higher than the
low limit of the sensor range.
Location in software: Operations Page > Alarm Set
Point > Alarm x (1 or 2).
Alarm Hysteresis
An alarm state is triggered when the process value High Side Alarm Range Alarm High Set Point
reaches the alarm high or alarm low set point.
Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must Alarm Hysteresis
return into the normal operating range before the
alarm can be cleared.
Temperature
Normal Operating Range

Alarm hysteresis is a zone inside each alarm set
point. This zone is defined by adding the hysteresis
value to the alarm low set point or subtracting the Alarm Hysteresis
hysteresis value from the alarm high set point.
Alarm Low Set Point
Location in software: Setup Page > Alarm Output x Low Side Alarm Range
(1 or 2).
Time
Figure 6.8 — Alarm Settings.
Process or Deviation Alarms

A process alarm uses one or two absolute set points
to define an alarm condition. A deviation alarm us-
es one or two set points that are defined relative to
the control set point. High and low alarm set points
are calculated by adding and/or subtracting offset
values from the control set point. If the set point
changes, the window defined by the alarm set
points automatically changes with it.
In the Series F4 you must configure each alarm
output as either a process or deviation alarm.
Location in software: Setup Page > Alarm Output x
(1 or 2).

Alarm Latching The alarm state begins when the temperature
reaches the alarm high set point.
A latched alarm will remain active after the alarm
condition has passed. It can only be deactivated by Alarm High
Set Point
the user. An alarm that is not latched (self-clear-
ing) will deactivate automatically when the alarm Alarm Hysteresis
condition has passed.
Normal Operating Range
Temperature
Location in software: Setup Page > Alarm x (1 or 2). The alarm state continues until the
temperature drops to the alarm high
Process set point minus the hysteresis. A
Temperature latching alarm could be turned off by
the operator at this point. A non-
latching alarm would turn off
automatically.
Alarm Low
Set Point
Time
Figure 6.9a — Alarm Latching.
Alarm Silencing
Alarm silencing has two uses: Alarm High
Set Point
1. It is often used to allow a system to warm up
after it has been started up. With alarm silenc- Hysteresis
ing on, an alarm is not triggered when the pro- Process

Temperature Normal Operating Range
cess temperature is initially lower than the
Temperature
Alarm is
enabled
alarm low set point. The process temperature here.
has to enter the normal operating range beyond
the hysteresis zone to activate the alarm func- Hysteresis
tion.
Startup, Alarm Alarm Low
2. Alarm silencing also allows the operator to dis- alarm is is triggered Set Point
disabled.
able the alarm output while the controller is in here.
an alarm state. The process temperature has to Time
enter the normal operating range beyond the Figure 6.9b — Alarm Silencing.
hysteresis zone to activate the alarm output
function.
If the Series F4 has an output that is functioning
as a deviation alarm, the alarm is silenced when
the set point is changed, until the process value re-
enters the normal operating range.
Location in software: Setup Page > Alarm x (1 or 2).
Alarm Sides
Alarms can be configured to trigger when the pro-
cess exceeds the High Alarm Set Point, the Low
Alarm Set Point or both.
Location in software: Setup Page > Alarm x (1 or 2).
(Alarm set points are established in the Operations
Page.)

Advanced Features
Boost Heat and Boost Cool 100%
85%
The boost heat feature uses a digital output to turn
Boost Percent
on an additional heater to speed up the heating. As Power = 85%
the process temperature approaches the set point, Heat
% Power
the boost heat output switches off so that the pro-
cess temperature doesn’t overshoot the set point.
Boost cool uses a digital output to speed up the
cooling process, typically by activating a solenoid 0%
Boost On Delay
valve that releases liquid nitrogen. = 30 Seconds
Time In Seconds
On
For either boost heat or boost cool, set Boost % Pow- Boost Heat
Off
er to define the power level that must be exceeded
before the boost output is activated. Use a positive Time In Seconds
value for heating, a negative value for cooling. 0%
To prevent the output from cycling and to extend

hardware life, define Boost Time Delay in seconds
to set the minimum period of time that the output Cool
% Power
will remain off after an on cycle.
Boost Percent
The Series F4 uses digital output 6 for boost heat Power = 85%
-85%
and digital output 7 for boost cool. Hysteresis for
boost heat and cool is fixed at 5%. -100%
Location in software: Setup > Digital Output x (6 or 7). Boost Delay Time = 30 Seconds
On
Boost Cool
Off
Figure 6.10a — Boost Heat and Boost Cool.
Compressor Control % Power

Heat 100%
The compressor control can save wear on a com-
pressor and prevent it from locking up from short
cycling. A bypass valve operated by a control output 2% Compressor
regulates how the process is cooled, while a digital 2% Off Power
0%
output switches the compressor on and off. 0% Compressor
On Power
The Series F4 uses digital output 8 for compressor
control. Compressor On % Power sets the power
Cool -100%
level that will switch the compressor on. Compres- Time In Seconds
sor Off % Power sets the power level that will Compressor On Delay = 45 Seconds
On
switch the compressor off. Compressor
Off
The compressor will not turn on until the output Compressor Off Delay = 20 Seconds
power exceeds the Compressor On % Power for a Figure 6.10b — Compressor Power.
time longer than the Compressor On Delay. The
compressor will not turn off until the output power
exceeds the Compressor Off % Power for a time
longer than the Compressor Off Delay.
Location in software: Setup Page > Digital Output 8.

Cascade Curve A (PID)
Cascade control is a control strategy in which one
control loop provides the set point for another loop. Set
Point
It allows the process or part temperature to be
reached quickly while minimizing overshoot. Cas-
Curve B (Cascade)
cade is used to optimize the performance of thermal
Temperature
systems with long lag times. Curve C (Single-control)
This graph illustrates a thermal system with a long

lag time. Curve A represents a single-loop control
system with PID parameters that allow a maximum
heat-up rate. Too much energy is introduced and the
set point is overshot. In most systems with long lag
time, the process value may never settle out to an Time
acceptable error. Curve C represents a single-control Figure 6.11a — Control Lag Times.
system tuned to minimize overshoot. This results in
unacceptable heat-up rates, taking hours to reach Outer Loop
Set Point
the final value. Curve B shows a cascade system (Process Part) Control Outer Loop
PID Set 1-5
that limits the energy introduced into the system, +
Error Signal ES/PB x 100 = % Out
allowing an optimal heat-up rate with minimal over- Input 3 -
Percent Power
shoot. Outer Loop
(Process Part) 0% to 100%
Cascade control uses two control loops (outer and in-

ner) to control the process. The outer loop (analog Inner Loop
0% = Cascade Low Range/Deviation
input 3) monitors the process or part temperature, 100% = Cascade High Range/Deviation
which is then compared to the set point. The result (Heat)
+ Cascade Inner Loop
of the comparison, the error signal, is acted on by Input 1 PID Set 1-5
0 to 100%
Inner Loop - Error Signal ES/PB x 100 = % Out
the settings in a Cascade Outer Loop PID set (1 to (Energy Source)
(Cool)
0 to -100%
5), which then generates a power level for the outer
loop. The set point for the inner loop is determined
by the outer-loop power level and the Cascade Low
Range/Deviation and the Cascade High Range/Devi- ✔ NOTE: Cascade Low Range and Cascade High Range Set
ation settings for analog input 3. Points for Input 1 (as shown above) are setup under Analog In-
The inner loop (analog input 1) monitors the energy put 3. Refer to Setup Chapter.
source (heating and cooling), which is compared to
the inner loop set point generated by the outer loop. Figure 6.11b — Cascade Control.
The result of the comparison, the error signal, is act-
ed on by the settings in a Cascade Inner Loop PID
set (1 to 5), which generates an output power level outer-loop
between -100% to +100%. If the power level is posi- thermocouple
tive the heat will be on; if the power level is nega- input 3 1A
1B
F4
output 1
oil in oil out
tive the cool will come on. input 1

/M
A
1
In Series F4 controllers, cascade control is available limit heater inner-loop

thermocouple
on channel 1. Analog input 3 is used to measure the limit sensor
outer-loop process while analog input 1, the inner Lube O il Ta nk
loop, is used to measure the energy source. Power

from the energy sources are supplied by outputs 1A
and 1B. Figure 6.11 — Cascade Example
To set up and tune a system for cascade control, see
the Operations Chapter.
Location in software: Setup Page and Operations
Page.

Notes

7
Chapter Seven: Communications
Exception Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2

Modbus Registers (Alphabetical Order) . . . . . . . . .7.2
Profiling Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10
Modbus Registers (Numerical Order) . . . . . . . . . . .7.13
Communications Page Parameter Table . . . . . . . . .7.16
Profiling Flow Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.17
Overview
The Series F4 uses Modbus as its communications Dependencies between parameters do exist. For
protocol. Modbus is a standard protocol developed best results, program the parameters in the order
by A.E.G. Schneider. Modbus RTU enables a com- in which they appear in the Software Map (inside
puter or PLC to read and write directly to registers back cover).
containing the controller’s parameters. With it you To program a profile using Modbus, refer to the
can read all of the controller’s parameters with a Profiling Flow Charts in this chapter.
few read commands.
For basic information about writing an application
If you already have a software application that us- using Modbus protocol, you may want to download
es Modbus, the Modbus Registers Table in this the electronic Watlow Controls Data Communica-
chapter will provide the register number and val- tions Guide from the Watlow web site:
ues (sometimes called enumerated types) for each http://www.watlow.com/prodtechinfo
parameter. Search on data communications reference.
Exception Responses
When a controller cannot process a command it returns an exception response and sets
the high bit (0x80) of the command.
0x01 illegal command
0x02 illegal data address
0x03 illegal data value
Packet returned by controller:| nn | nn | nn | nn nn | |

∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
controller address (one byte)
command + 0x80
exception code (0x01 or 0x02 or 0x03)
CRC low byte
CRC high byte
✔ NOTE:
For ranges, conditions and other information, look up parameter names in
the Index, which will direct you to earlier chapters in this book.
Watlow Series F4S/D Communications ■ 7.1

Series F4 Modbus Registers
Parameters Sorted Alphabetically
Register numbers listed are relative values. To convert to absolute values, add 40001. Registers for
profiling parameters are in a separate section at the end of this list, followed by a list of all Mod-
bus registers in numerical order. For more information about parameters, see the Index.
103 % Power Output 1A, Status 722 Alarm Silencing, Alarm Output 2
r 0 to 100 (expressed in %) r/w 0 No
107 % Power Output 1B, Status 1 Yes
r 0 to 100 (expressed in %) 716 Alarm Source, Alarm Output 1
111 % Power Output 2A, Status r/w 0 Input 1
r 0 to 100 (expressed in %) 1 Input 2
115 % Power Output 2B, Status 2 Input 3
r 0 to 100 (expressed in %) 733 Alarm Source, Alarm Output 2
102 Alarm 1, Status r/w 0 Input 1
r 1 Input 2
106 Alarm 2, Status 2 Input 3
r 702 Alarm Type, Alarm Output 1
303 Alarm High Deviation, Alarm 1, Value r/w 0 Off
r/w 1 to 30000 1 Process
2 Deviation
322 Alarm High Deviation, Alarm 2, Value
r/w 1 to 30000 719 Alarm Type, Alarm Output 2
r/w 0 Off
303 Alarm High Set Point, Alarm 1, Value
1 Process
r/w <per sensor> to Alarm 1 Low Set Point
2 Deviation
322 Alarm High Set Point, Alarm 2, Value
r/w <per sensor> to Alarm 2 Low Set Point 1902 Altitude, Analog Input 2
r/w 0 0 to 2499 ft
703 Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Output 1
1 2500 to 4999 ft
r/w 1 to 30000
2 5000 ft and above
720 Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Output 2
606 Analog Input 1 Decimal Point
r/w 1 to 30000
r/w 0 0
704 Alarm Latching, Alarm Output 1 1 00
r/w 0 Alarm Self-clears 2 000
1 Alarm Latches 3 0000
721 Alarm Latching, Alarm Output 2 616 Analog Input 2 Decimal Point
r/w 0 Alarm Self-clears r/w 0 0
1 Alarm Latches 1 00
707 Alarm Logic, Alarm Output 1 2 000
r/w 0 Open on Alarm 3 0000
1 Close on Alarm 626 Analog Input 3 Decimal Point
724 Alarm Logic, Alarm Output 2 r/w 0 0
r/w 0 Open on Alarm 1 00
1 Close on Alarm 2 000
302 Alarm Low Deviation, Alarm 1, Value 3 0000
r/w -19999 to -1 836 Analog Range, Retransmit Output 1
321 Alarm Low Deviation, Alarm 2, Value r/w 0 4 to 20mA
r/w -19999 to -1 1 0 to 20mA
302 Alarm Low Set Point, Alarm 1, Value 2 0 to 5V
r/w <per sensor> to Alarm 1 High Set Point 3 1 to 5V
321 Alarm Low Set Point, Alarm 2, Value 4 1 to 10V
r/w <per sensor> to Alarm 2 High Set Point 837 Analog Range, Retransmit Output 2
708 Alarm Messages, Alarm Output 1 r/w 0 4 to 20mA
1 0 to 20mA
r/w 0 Yes on Main Page
2 0 to 5V
1 No
3 1 to 5V
725 Alarm Messages, Alarm Output 2 4 1 to 10V
r/w 0 Yes on Main Page
305 Autotune Channel 1
1 No r/w 0 Tune Off
1308 Alarm Set Point, Lockout 1 PID Set 1
r/w 0 Full Access 2 PID Set 2
1 Read Only 3 PID Set 3
2 Password 4 PID Set 4
3 Hidden 5 PID Set 5
706 Alarm Sides, Alarm Output 1 324 Autotune Channel 2
r/w 0 Both r/w 0 Tune Off
1 Low 1 PID Set 6
2 High 2 PID Set 7
723 Alarm Sides, Alarm Output 2 3 PID Set 8
r/w 0 Both 4 PID Set 9
1 Low 5 PID Set 10
2 High 343 Autotune Cascade
705 Alarm Silencing, Alarm Output 1 r/w 0 Tune Off
r/w 0 No 1 PID Set 1
1 Yes 2 PID Set 2
3 PID Set 3
4 PID Set 4
5 PID Set 5
7.2 ■ Communications Watlow Series F4S/D

1306 Autotune PID, Lockout 717 Control Output 1B Function
r/w 0 Full Access r/w 0 Off
1 Read Only 1 Heat
2 Password 2 Cool
3 Hidden 734 Control Output 2A Function
304 Autotune Set Point, Channel 1, Value r/w 1 Heat ✔ NOTE:
r/w 50 to 150 (expressed in %) 2 Cool
323 Autotune Set Point, Channel 2, Value
For more information about
751 Control Output 2B Function
r/w 50 to 150 (expressed in %) r/w 0 Off parameters, see the Index.
2062 Boost Cool % Power, Digital Output 7 1 Heat
r/w -100 to 0 for Cool (expressed in %) 2 Cool
2064 Boost Cool Delay On Time, Digital Output 7 1920 Current Date, Day
r/w 0 to 9999 seconds r/w 1 to 31
2062 Boost Cool Power 1919 Current Date, Month
r/w Value r/w 1 to 12
2064 Boost Cool Time 1921 Current Date, Year
r/w Value r/w 1998 to 2035
2052 Boost Heat % Power, Digital Output 6 1916 Current Time, Hour
r/w 0 to 0 for Heat (expressed in %) r/w 0 o 23
2054 Boost Heat Delay On Time, Digital Output 6 1917 Current Time, Minutes
r/w 0 to 9999 seconds r/w 0 to 59
2052 Boost Heat Power 1918 Current Time, Seconds
r/w Value in % r/w 0 to 59
2054 Boost Heat Time 1400-15 Custom Main Page Parameters (P1 to P16)
r/w Value in seconds r/w 0 None
605 Calibration Offset, Analog Input 1 1 Input I Value
r/w -19999 to 30000 2 Input 2 Value
3 Input 2 Value
615 Calibration Offset, Analog Input 2
4 Set Point 1
r/w -19999 to 30000
5 Set Point 2
625 Calibration Offset, Analog Input 3 6 % Power 1
r/w -19999 to 30000 7 % Power 2
1922 Cascade Inner Set Point 8 Tune Status 1
r 9 Tune Status 2
1925 Cascade Type 10 Time
r/w 0 No Cascade 11 Date
1 Process Cascade 12 Digital Inputs
2 Deviation Cascade 13 Digital Outputs
1926 Cascade, Range Low 14 Time Remaining
r/w Depends on Sensor 15 Current File
1927 Cascade, Range High 16 Current Step
r/w Depends on Sensor 17 Active Ch1 PID Set
1330-33 Change Password 18 Active Ch2 PID Set
r/w ASCII codes 0-9, A-Z 19 Last Jump Step
20 Jump Count
1501 CJC1 AtoD, Diagnostics
21 Wait For Status
r HHHH see In 1 AD
22 Step Type
1500 CJC1 Temp, Diagnostics 23 Target Set Point 1
r value 24 Target Set Point 2
1532 CJC2 AtoD, Diagnostics 25 Internal Cascade Set Point
r HHHH 26 Custom Message 1
1531 CJC2 Temp, Diagnostics 27 Custom Message 2
r value 28 Custom Message 3
312 Clear Alarm 1, Key Press Simulation 29 Custom Message 4
w write any value 30 Input1 Cal. Offset
331 Clear Alarm 2, Key Press Simulation 31 Input2 Cal. Offset
w write any value 32 Input3 Cal. Offset
311 Clear Error 1, Key Press Simulation 4501-18 Custom Message 1
w write any value r/w
1315 Clear Locks 4561-78 Custom Message 4
0 yes r/w
2046 Complementary Output, Digital Output 5 509 Cycle Time (type), Control Output 1A
0 1A r/w 0 Variable Burst
1 1B 1 Fixed Time
2 2A 506 Cycle Time Value, Control Output 1A
3 2B r/w number
2073 Compressor Off % Power, Digital Output 8 559 Cycle Time (type), Control Output 1B
r/w Compressor On % Power to 100% r/w 0 Variable Burst
2075 Compressor Off Delay, Digital Output 8 1 Fixed Time
r/w 0 to 9999 seconds 556 Cycle Time Value, Control Output 1B
2072 Compressor On % Power, Digital Output 8 r/w number
r/w -100 to 100 (expressed in percent) 2509 Cycle Time (type), Control Output 2A
2074 Compressor On Delay, Digital Output 8 r/w 0 Variable Burst
r/w 1 to 9999 seconds 1 Fixed Time
2506 Cycle Time Value, Control Output 2A,
Control Output Calibration — see Process Output Calibration
r/w number
700 Control Output 1A Function
2559 Cycle Time (type), Control Output 2B
r/w 1 Heat
0 Variable Burst
2 Cool
1 Fixed Time

2556 Cycle Time Value, Control Output 2B 543 Derivative 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1
r/w number r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
2605 Dead Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 2653 Derivative 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
r/w 0 to 30000 r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
505 Dead Band 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 553 Derivative 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1
2655 Dead Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 2503 Derivative 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2
555 Dead Band 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 2553 Derivative 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2
2505 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 201 Digital Input 1, Status
r/w 1 to 30000 0 Low
2515 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 1 High
r/w 1 to 30000 1061 Digital Input 1 Condition
2525 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 r/w 0 Low
r/w 1 to 30000 1 High
2535 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 1060 Digital Input 1 Function
r/w 1 to 30000 r/w 0 Off
2545 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 1 Panel Lock
r/w 1 to 30000 2 Reset Alarm
2555 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 3 Control Outputs Off
r/w 1 to 30000 4 All Outputs Off
5 Digital Outputs Off
2565 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2
6 Start Profile
r/w 1 to 30000
7 Pause Profile
2575 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2 8 Resume Profile
r/w 1 to 30000 9 Terminate Profile
2585 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2 10 Wait For Event
r/w 1 to 30000 1075 Digital Input 1, Start Profile
2595 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2 r/w 1 to 40
r/w 1 to 30000
1076 Digital Input 1, Start Step
2603 Derivative 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 r/w 1 to 256
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
213 Digital Input 2, Status
2613 Derivative 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
0 Low
1 High
1063 Digital Input 2 Condition
r/w 0 Low
2633 Derivative 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1 1 High
1062 Digital Input 2 Function
r/w 0 Off
1 Panel Lock
503 Derivative 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 2 Reset Alarm
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 3 Control Outputs Off
513 Derivative 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 4 All Outputs Off
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 5 Digital Outputs Off
523 Derivative 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 6 Start Profile
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 7 Pause Profile
533 Derivative 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 8 Resume Profile
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 9 Terminate Profile
10 Wait For Event

1077 Digital Input 2, Start Profile 2946 Control Output
r/w 1 to 40 r/w 0 1A
1078 Digital Input 2, Start Step 1 1B
r/w 1 to 256 2 2A
3 2B
225 Digital Input 3, Status
0 Low 2050 Digital Output 6, Condition
1 High r/w 0 Off
1 On
1065 Digital Input 3 Condition
r/w 0 Low 2051 Digital Output 6 Function
1 High r/w 0 Off
1 Event Output
1064 Digital Input 3 Function
3 Boost Heat
r/w 0 Off
1 Panel Lock 2060 Digital Output 7, Condition
2 Reset Alarm r/w 0 Off
3 Control Outputs Off 1 On
4 All Outputs Off 2061 Digital Output 7 Function
✔ NOTE:
5 Digital Outputs Off r/w 0 Off For more information
6 Start Profile 1 Event Output
7 Pause Profile 4 Boost Cool about parameters, see
8 Resume Profile 2070 Digital Output 8, Condition the Index.
9 Terminate Profile r/w 0 Off
10 Wait For Event 1 On
1079 Digital Input 3, Start Profile 2071 Digital Output 8 Function
r/w 1 to 40 r/w 0 Off
1080 Digital Input 3, Start Step 1 Event Output
r/w 1 to 256 5 Compressor
237 Digital Input 4, Status 2072 Power On
0 Low r/w Value
1 High 2073 Power Off
1067 Digital Input 4 Condition r/w Value
r/w 0 Low 2074 Delay On
1 High r/w Value
1066 Digital Input 4 Function 2055 Delay Off
r/w 0 Off r/w Value
1 Panel Lock 1513 Display Test, Test
2 Reset Alarm w 0 Off
3 Control Outputs Off 1 On
4 All Outputs Off 1307 Edit PID, Lockout
5 Digital Outputs Off r/w 0 Full Access
6 Start Profile 1 Read Only
7 Pause Profile 2 Password
8 Resume Profile 3 Hidden
9 Terminate Profile 607 Error Latching, Analog Input 1
10 Wait For Event r/w 0 Self Clear
1081 Digital Input 4, Start Profile 1 Latch
r/w 1 to 40 617 Error Latching, Analog Input 2
1082 Digital Input 4, Start Step r/w 0 Self Clear
r/w 1 to 256 1 Latch
2000 Digital Output 1, Condition 627 Error Latching, Analog Input 3
r/w 0 Off r/w 0 Self Clear
1 On 1 Latch
2001 Digital Output 1 Function 1303 Factory Page, Lockout
r/w 0 Off r/w 0 Full Access
1 Event Output 1 Read Only
2 Password
2010 Digital Output 2, Condition
r/w 0 Off 604 Filter Time, Analog Input 1
1 On r/w -600 to 600 (expressed in tenths of seconds)
614 Filter Time, Analog Input 2
2011 Digital Output 2 Function
r/w -600 to 600 (expressed in tenths of seconds)
r/w 0 Off
1 Event Output 624 Filter Time, Analog Input 3
r/w -600 to 600 (expressed in tenths of seconds)
2020 Digital Output 3, Condition
r/w 0 Off 1602 Full Defaults
1 On 800 yes
2021 Digital Output 3 Function 1205 Guaranteed Soak Band, Channel 1
r/w 0 Off r/w 1 to 9999
1 Event Output 1212 Guaranteed Soak Band, Channel 2
2030 Digital Output 4, Condition r/w 1 to 9999
r/w 0 Off 1220 Guaranteed Soak Band 1 Source
1 On r/w 0 Input 1
2031 Digital Output 4 Function 1 Input 2
r/w 0 Off 2 Input 3
1 Event Output 1221 Guaranteed Soak Band 2 Source
2040 Digital Output 5, Condition r/w 0 Input 1
r/w 0 Off 1 Input 2
1 On 2 Input 3
714 High Power Limit, Control Output 1A
2041 Digital Output 5 Function
r/w Low Limit+1 to 100 (expressed in %)
r/w 0 Off
1 Event Output 731 High Power Limit, Control Output 1B
2 Complementary Output r/w Low Limit+1 to 100 (expressed in %)

748 High Power Limit, Control Output 2A 8 Input 1 Type, Diagnostics
r/w Low Limit+1 to 100 (expressed in %) r Univ
765 High Power Limit, Control Output 2B 100 Input 1 Value, Status
r/w Low Limit+1 to 100 (expressed in %) r value
711 High Scale, Retransmit Output 1 1603 Input 1, Calibrate
r/w Low Scale +1 to 30000 (maximum sensor range) 1 0 mV Thermocouple
728 High Scale, Retransmit Output 2 2 50 mV Thermocouple
r/w Low Scale +1 to 30000 (maximum sensor range) 3 32° Type J
2607 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 4 Ground
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 5 Lead
2617 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1 6 15.0 ohms
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 7 380.0 ohms
2627 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1 8 0.000 V
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 9 10.000 V
10 4.000 mA
2637 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
11 20.000 mA
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting)
2647 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1 1505 Input 2 AtoD, Diagnostics
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) r HHHH
507 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 105 Input 2 Error, Status
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 906 Input 2 Fail % Power, System
517 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 r/w -100 to 100 (expressed in %)
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 222 Input 2 Open Loop, Status
527 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 9 Input 2 Type, Diagnostics
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) r Univ
537 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 None
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 104 Input 2 Value, Status
547 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1 r value
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 1608 Input 2, Calibrate
2657 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 1 0 mV Thermocouple
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 2 50 mV Thermocouple
2667 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1 3 32° Type J
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 4 Ground
2677 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1 5 Lead
2687 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1 7 380.0 ohms
2697 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1 9 10.000 V
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 10 4.000 mA
11 20.000 mA
557 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting)) 1506 Input 3 AtoD, Diagnostics
r HHHH
567 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 109 Input 3 Error, Status
577 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 10 Input 3 Type, Diagnostics
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) r Univ
587 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 None
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 108 Input 3 Value, Status
597 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 r value
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 1613 Input 3, Calibrate
2507 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 1 0 mV Thermocouple
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 2 50 mV Thermocouple
2517 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 3 32° Type J
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 4 Ground
5 Lead
2527 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 6 15.0 ohms
2537 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 8 0.000 V
2547 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 10 4.000 mA
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) 11 20.000 mA
2557 Hysteresis 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2601 Integral 1A , Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
r/w 1 to 30000 (dependent on decimal setting) r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
308 Idle Set Point, Channel 1, Power Out Action 501 Integral 1A , PID Set 1, Channel 1
327 Idle Set Point, Channel 2, Power Out Action 511 Integral 1A , PID Set 2, Channel 1
1504 Input 1 AtoD, Diagnostics 521 Integral 1A , PID Set 3, Channel 1
r HHHH r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
101 Input 1 Error, Status 531 Integral 1A , PID Set 4, Channel 1
903 Input 1 Fail % Power, System
r/w -100 to 100 (expressed in %) 541 Integral 1A , PID Set 5, Channel 1
210 Input 1 Open Loop, Status

2651 Integral 1B , Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 3120-29 Name, Digital Output 3 (10 characters)
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
2661 Integral 1B , Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 3130-39 Name, Digital Output 4 (10 characters)
2671 Integral 1B , Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1 r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
3160-69 Name, Digital Output 7 (10 characters)
551 Integral 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
3170-79 Name, Digital Output 8 (10 characters)
561 Integral 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1 r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
904 Open Loop Channel 1
571 Integral 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 r/w 0 Off
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 1 On
581 Integral 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 907 Open Loop Channel 2
✔ NOTE:
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r/w 0 Off For more information
591 Integral 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 1 On
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 200 Operation Mode, Status
about parameters, see
2501 Integral 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 r 0 Terminate Profile the Index.
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 1 Pre-run Profile
2511 Integral 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2 Running Profile
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 3 Holding Profile
2521 Integral 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 16 Output 1A Type, Diagnostics
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r 1 DC
2531 Integral 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 2 SSR
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 3 Process
2541 Integral 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 17 Output 1B Type, Diagnostics
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r 0 None
1 DC
2551 Integral 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2
2 SSR
3 Process
2561 Integral 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2
18 Output 2A Type, Diagnostics
r 0 None
2571 Integral 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2 1 DC
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 2 SSR
2581 Integral 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2 3 Process
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 19 Output 2B Type, Diagnostics
2591 Integral 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2 r 0 None
r/w 000 to 9999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 1 DC
1515 Line Frequency, Diagnostics 2 SSR
r xx 3 Process
715 Low Power Limit, Control Output 1A 900 PID Units, System
r/w 0 to High Limit-1000 to 9999 (expressed in %) r/w 0 US (Reset/Rate)
732 Low Power Limit, Control Output 1B 1 SI (Integral/Derivative)
r/w 0 to High Limit-1 (expressed in %) 1206 Power-Out Action
749 Low Power Limit, Control Output 2A r/w 0 Continue
r/w 0 to High Limit-1 (expressed in %) 1 Hold
2 Terminate
766 Low Power Limit, Control Output 2B 3 Reset
r/w 0 to High Limit-1 (expressed in %) 4 Idle Set Point 1
710 Low Scale, Retransmit Output 1 5 Idle Set Point 2
r/w -19999 to Scale High-1 (minimum sensor range) 1213 Power-Out Time
727 Low Scale, Retransmit Output 2 r/w 0 to 9999 seconds
r/w -19999 to Scale High-2 (minimum sensor range) 5500 Process Display
5 Mfg. Date, Diagnostics r/w 0 Input 1 only
r xxxx 1 Alternating
0 Model, Diagnostics 5501 Process Display, Input 1 Time
r F4 r/w 0 to 999
3200-09 Name, Alarm 1 (10 characters) 5502 Process Display, Input 2 Time
r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart r/w 0 to 999
3210-19 Name, Alarm 2 (10 characters) 5503 Process Display, Input 3 Time
r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart r/w 0 to 999
3000-06 Name, Digital Input 1 (7 characters) 1606 Process Output 1A, 1.000V, Calibrate
r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart w 0000 to 3000 (expressed in thousandths volts)
3010-16 Name, Digital Input 2 (7 characters) 1607 Process Output 1A, 10.000V, Calibrate
r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart w 0000 to 12000 (expressed in thousandths volts)
3020-26 Name, Digital Input 3 (7 characters) 1605 Process Output 1A, 20.000mA, Calibrate
r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart w 0000 to 24000 (expressed in microamps)
3030-36 Name, Digital Input 4 (7 characters) 1604 Process Output 1A, 4.000mA, Calibrate
r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart w 0000 to 6000 (expressed in microamps)
3100-09 Name, Digital Output 1 (10 characters) 1611 Process Output 1B, 1.000V, Calibrate
w 0000 to 3000 (expressed in thousandths volts)
r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
1612 Process Output 1B, 10.000V, Calibrate
3110-19 Name, Digital Output 2 (10 characters) w 0000 to 12000 (expressed in thousandths volts)
r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart 1610 Process Output 1B, 20.000mA, Calibrate
w 0000 to 24000 (expressed in microamps)

1609 Process Output 1B, 4.000mA, Calibrate 540 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1
w 0000 to 6000 (expressed in microamps) r/w 0 to 30000
1616 Process Output 2A, 1.000V, Calibrate 2650 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
w 0000 to 3000 (expressed in thousandths volts) r/w 0 to 30000
1617 Process Output 2A, 10.000V, Calibrate
w 0000 to 12000 (expressed in thousandths volts) 2660 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1615 Process Output 2A, 20.000mA, Calibrate r/w 0 to 30000
w 0000 to 24000 (expressed in microamps) 2670 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
1614 Process Output 2A, 4.000mA, Calibrate r/w 0 to 30000
w 0000 to 6000 (expressed in microamps) 2680 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
1621 Process Output 2B, 1.000V, Calibrate r/w 0 to 30000
w 0000 to 3000 (expressed in thousandths volts) 2690 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
1622 Process Output 2B, 10.000V, Calibrate r/w 0 to 30000
w 0000 to 12000 (expressed in thousandths volts) 550 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1
1620 Process Output 2B, 20.000mA, Calibrate r/w 0 to 30000
w 0000 to 24000 (expressed in microamps) 560 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1
1619 Process Output 2B, 4.000mA, Calibrate r/w 0 to 30000
w 0000 to 6000 (expressed in microamps) 570 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1
608 Process Units, Analog Input r/w 0 to 30000
r/w 0 Temperature 580 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1
1 %rh r/w 0 to 30000
2 psi 590 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1
3 units r/w 0 to 30000
618 Process Units, Analog Input 2 2500 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2
r/w 0 Temperature r/w 0 to 30000
1 %rh
2510 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2
2 psi
r/w 0 to 30000
3 units
628 Process Units, Analog Input 3 2520 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2
r/w 0 Temperature r/w 0 to 30000
1 %rh 2530 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2
2 psi r/w 0 to 30000
3 units 2540 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2
701 Process, Control Output 1A r/w 0 to 30000
r/w 0 4 to 20mA 2550 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2
1 0 to 20mA r/w 0 to 30000
2 0 to 10V 2560 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2
3 0 to 5V r/w 0 to 30000
4 1 to 5V
2570 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2
718 Process, Control Output 1B r/w 0 to 30000
r/w 0 4 to 20mA
1 0 to 20mA 2580 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2
2 0 to 10V r/w 0 to 30000
3 0 to 5V 2590 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
4 1 to 5V r/w 0 to 30000
735 Process, Control Output 2A 2604 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
r/w 0 4 to 20mA r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
1 0 to 20mA 2614 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
2 0 to 10V r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
3 0 to 5V 2624 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
4 1 to 5V r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
752 Process, Control Output 2B 2634 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
r/w 0 4 to 20mA r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
1 0 to 20mA
2644 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
2 0 to 10V
3 0 to 5V
4 1 to 5V 504 Rate 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1
1309 Profiles, Lockout
r/w 0 Full Access 514 Rate 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1
1 Read Only r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
2 Password 524 Rate 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1
3 Hidden r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
2600 Proportional Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 534 Rate 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1
2610 Proportional Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1 544 Rate 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1
2620 Proportional Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1 2654 Rate 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
500 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 2684 Rate 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
510 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 2694 Rate 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
520 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 554 Rate 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1
530 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 564 Rate 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1

574 Rate 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 2562 Reset 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)s r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes)
2504 Rate 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2592 Reset 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
2514 Rate 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 1601 Restore Factory Calibration
0 Input 1
1 Input 2 ✔ NOTE:
2524 Rate 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 2 Input 3
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) For more information
20 Retransmit 1 Type, Diagnostics
2534 Rate 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 r 0 None about parameters, see
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 1 Process
2544 Rate 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 21 Retransmit 2 Type, Diagnostics
the Index.
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r 0 None
2554 Rate 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 1 Process
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 1626 Retransmit Output 1, 1.000V, Calibrate
2564 Rate 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2 r/w 0000 to 3000 (expressed in thousandths volts)
2574 Rate 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2 r/w 0000 to 12000 (expressed in thousandths volts)
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 1625 Retransmit Output 1, 20.000mA, Calibrate
2584 Rate 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2 r/w 0000 to 24000 (expressed in microamps)
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 1624 Retransmit Output 1, 4.000mA, Calibrate
r/w 0000 to 6000 (expressed in microamps)
2594 Rate 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
r/w 0000 to 3000 (expressed in thousandths volts)
2602 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 1632 Retransmit Output 2, 10.000V, Calibrate
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r/w 0000 to 12000 (expressed in thousandths volts)
2612 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1 1630 Retransmit Output 2, 20.000mA, Calibrate
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r/w 0000 to 24000 (expressed in microamps)
2622 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
1629 Retransmit Output 2, 4.000mA
r/w 0000 to 6000 (expressed in microamps)
2632 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
709 Retransmit Source, Retransmit Output 1
r/w 0 Input 1
2642 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1 1 Input 2
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 2 Input 3
502 Reset 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 3 Set Point 1
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 4 Set Point 2
512 Reset 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 5 Channel 1 Power
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 6 Channel 2 Power
522 Reset 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 726 Retransmit Source, Retransmit Output 2
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r/w 0 Input 1
532 Reset 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 1 Input 2
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 2 Input 3
542 Reset 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1 3 Set Point 1
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 4 Set Point 2
5 Channel 1 Power
2652 Reset 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1 6 Channel 2 Power
25 Save Changes to EE
2662 Reset 1B, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1 0 Save
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 681 Scale High, Analog Input 1
2672 Reset 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1 r/w Depends on sensor and decimal point selection.
683 Scale High, Analog Input 2
685 Scale High, Analog Input 3
680 Scale Low, Analog Input 1
552 Reset 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 r/w Depends on sensor and decimal point selection.
712 Scale Offset, Retransmit Output 1
582 Reset 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 r/w -19999 to 30000
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) Range Low to Range High
592 Reset 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 729 Scale Offset, Retransmit Output 2
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) r/w -19999 to 30000
2502 Reset 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 Range Low to Range High
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 601 Sensor Type, Analog Input 1
2512 Reset 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 r/w 0 J
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 1 K
2522 Reset 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 2 T
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 3 E
4 N
2532 Reset 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2
5 C
6 D
2542 Reset 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 7 PT2
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths of minutes) 8 R
2552 Reset 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 9 S
r/w 000 to 999 (expressed in hundredths per minutes) 10 B

11 100Ω DIN RTD 2 Serial Number, Second Part, Diagnostics
12 100Ω JIS RTD r 0 to 999999
13 4 to 20 mA Set Locks — see individual items to lock
14 0 to 20 mA
1330-33 Set Password
15 0 to 5V
16 1 to 5V r/w ASCII codes 0-9, A-Z
17 0 to 10V 300 Set Point 1, Value
18 0 to 50mV r/w Range Low 1 to Range High 1
23 500Ω DIN RTD 319 Set Point 2, Value
24 500Ω JIS RTD r/w Range Low 2 to Range High 2
25 1kΩ DIN RTD 603 Set Point High Limit, Analog Input 1
26 1kΩ JIS RTD r/w Depends on Sensor
611 Sensor Type, Analog Input 2 613 Set Point High Limit, Analog Input 2
r/w 0 J r/w Depends on Sensor
1 K
2 T 623 Set Point High Limit, Analog Input 3
3 E r/w Depends on Sensor
4 N 602 Set Point Low Limit, Analog Input 1
5 C r/w Depends on Sensor
6 D 612 Set Point Low Limit, Analog Input 2
7 PT2 r/w Depends on Sensor
8 R
622 Set Point Low Limit, Analog Input 3
9 S
10 B r/w Depends on Sensor
11 100Ω DIN RTD 1300 Set Point, Lockout
12 100Ω JIS RTD r/w 0 Full Access
13 4 to 20 mA 1 Read Only
14 0 to 20 mA 1302 Setup Page, Lockout
15 0 to 5V r/w 0 Full Access
16 1 to 5V 1 Read Only
17 0 to 10V 2 Password
18 0 to 50mV 3 Hidden
19 Vaisala 0 to 5V
20 Vaisala 0 to 10V
1923 Show °F or °C
21 Vaisala 0 to 20mA
r/w 0 No, Upper Display
22 Rotronics 0 to 5V
23 500Ω DIN RTD 1 Yes, Upper Display
24 500Ω JIS RTD 313 Silence Alarm 1, Key Press Simulation
25 1kΩ DIN RTD w Write any value
26 1kΩ JIS RTD 332 Silence Alarm 2, Key Press Simulation
621 Sensor Type, Analog Input 3 w Write any value
r/w 0 J 4 Software Revision, Diagnostics
✔ NOTE:
1 K 2 000 to 999 For more information
2 T 3 Software Number, Diagnostics
3 E r 0 to 99
about parameters, see the
4 N
5 C 1514 Test Outputs, Test Index.
6 D 0 All Off
7 PT2 1 Output 1A
8 R 2 Output 1B
9 S 3 Output 2A
10 B 4 Output 2B
11 100Ω DIN RTD 5 Retransmit 1
12 100Ω JIS RTD 6 Retransmit 2
13 4 to 20 mA 7 Alarm 1
14 0 to 20 mA 8 Alarm 2
15 0 to 5V 9 Digital Out 1)
16 1 to 5V 10 Digital Out 2
17 0 to 10V 11 Digital Out 3
18 0 to 50mV 12 Digital Out 4
23 500Ω DIN RTD 13 Digital Out 5
24 500Ω JIS RTD 14 Digital Out 6
25 1kΩ DIN RTD 15 Digital Out 7
26 1kΩ JIS RTD 16 Digital Out 8
600 Sensor, Analog Input 1 17 All On
r/w 0 Thermocouple 18 Communications
1 RTD 901 °F or °C, System
2 Process r/w 0 °F
4 Off 1 °C
610 Sensor, Analog Input 2
r/w 0 Thermocouple
1 RTD Profile Parameters
2 Process
3 Wet Bulb-Dry Bulb
4004 Autostart Profile Date or Day
4 Off
r/w 0 Date
620 Sensor, Analog Input 3 1 Day
r/w 0 Thermocouple
4009 Autostart Time (hours)
1 RTD
r/w 0 to 99
2 Process
4 Off 4010 Autostart Time (minutes)
r/w 0 to 59
1 Serial Number, First Part, Diagnostics
r 0 to 999999 4011 Autostart Time (seconds)
r/w 0 to 59

4006 Autostart, Date (day) 4030 Event Output 1, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
r/w 1 to 31 r/w 0 Off
4005 Autostart, Date (month) 1 On
r/w 0 to 12 4031 Event Output 2, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
4007 Autostart, Date (year) r/w 0 Off
r/w 1998 to 2035 1 On
4008 Autostart, Day (of week) 4032 Event Output 3, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
r/w 0 Every Day r/w 0 Off
1 Sunday 1 On
2 Monday 4033 Event Output 4, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
3 Tuesday r/w 0 Off
4 Wednesday 1 On
5 Thursday 4034 Event Output 5, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
6 Friday r/w 0 Off
7 Saturday 1 On
4035 Event Output 6, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
4046 Channel 1 PID Set, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps r/w 0 Off
r/w 0 Channel 1 PID 1 On
1 Channel 2 PID
4124 Channel 1 PID, Ramp Rate, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status r/w 0 Off
r 0 Channel 1 PID 1 On
1 Channel 2 PID
4047 Channel 2 PID Set, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps r/w 0 Off
r/w 0 Channel 1 PID 1 On
1 Channel 2 PID
4048 Guaranteed Soak Channel 1, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
4125 Channel 2 PID Set, Ramp Rate, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status r/w 0 No
r 0 Channel 1 PID 1 Yes
1 Channel 2 PID
4049 Guaranteed Soak Channel 2, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
Create Profile — see Edit Profile Action r/w 0 No
Delete Profile or Step — see Edit Profile Action 1 Yes
4111 Digital Output 1, Monitor Current Status (Profile) 1210 Hold a Profile, Key Press Simulation
r 0 Off w 1 Hold
1 On 4119 Hours Remaining, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
4112 Digital Output 2, Monitor Current Status (Profile) r 0 to 23
r 0 Off Insert Step — see Edit Profile Action
1 On
4126 Jump Count, Current Profile Status
r 0 Off
4127 Jump Profile, Current Profile Status
1 On
r 0 to 40
4114 Digital Output 4, Monitor Current Status (Profile)
4052 Jump Repeats, Jump Step
r 0 Off
r/w 1 to 999
1 On
4128 Jump Step, Current Profile Status
r 1-256
4115 Digital Output 5, Monitor Current Status (Profile)
r 0 Off 4050 Jump to Profile, Jump Step
1 On r/w 1 to 40
4116 Digital Output 6, Monitor Current Status (Profile) 4051 Jump to Step, Jump Step
r 0 Off r/w 1 to 256
1 On 4120 Minutes Remaining, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
r 0 Off 3500-09 Name, Profile 1 (10 characters)
1 On r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
4118 Digital Output 8, Monitor Current Status (Profile) 3510-19 Name, Profile 2 (10 characters)
r 0 Off r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
1 On 3520-29 Name, Profile 3 (10 characters)
4002 Edit Profile Action r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
1 Create 3530-39 Name, Profile 4 (10 characters)
2 Insert Step r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
3 Delete Current Profile 3540-49 Name, Profile 5 (10 characters)
4 Delete Step r/w ASCII equivalent decimal code — see Modbus Naming Flowchart
5 Start Profile
3550-59 Name, Profile 6 (10 characters)
255 Delete All Profiles
4060 End Action, End Step 3570-79 Name, Profile 8 (10 characters)
r/w 0 Hold
1 Control Off
2 All Off 3590-99 Name, Profile 10 (10 characters)
3 Idle 3600-09 Name, Profile 11 (10 characters)
4061 End Idle Setpoint Channel 1, End Step
r/w Set Point 1 Low Limit to Set Point 1 High Limit 3620-29 Name, Profile 13 (10 characters)
4062 End Idle Setpoint Channel 2, End Step
r/w Set Point 2 Low Limit to Set Point 2 High Limit 3640-49 Name, Profile 15 (10 characters)
4129 End Set Point Channel 1, Current Profile Status
r Range Low 1 to Range High 1
4130 End Set Point Channel 2, Current Profile Status
r Range Low 2 to Range High 2

3700-09 Name, Profile 21 (10 characters) 4011 Ramp Time (seconds)
3710-19 Name, Profile 22 (10 characters) r/w 0 to 59
3720-29 Name, Profile 23 (10 characters) 4043 Rate, Ramp Rate Step
3730-39 Name, Profile 24 (10 characters) r/w 1 to 3000 units per minute
3740-49 Name, Profile 25 (10 characters) ReName Profile — see Name, Profile x
3750-59 Name, Profile 26 (10 characters) 1209 Resume a Profile, Key Press Simulation
3760-69 Name, Profile 27 (10 characters) w 1 Resume
3770-79 Name, Profile 28 (10 characters) 25 Save Changes to EE
3780-89 Name, Profile 29 (10 characters) w 0
3790-99 Name, Profile 30 (10 characters) 4119 Hours Remaining, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3800-09 Name, Profile 31 (10 characters) r 0 to 99
3810-19 Name, Profile 32 (10 characters) 4120 Minutes Remaining, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3830-39 Name, Profile 34 (10 characters) 4121 Seconds Remaining, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3850-59 Name, Profile 36 (10 characters) 4122 Set Point Ch. 1, Ramp Rate, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3860-69 Name, Profile 37 (10 characters) r Range low to range high
3870-79 Name, Profile 38 (10 characters) 4123 Set Point Ch. 2, Ramp Rate, Ramp Time or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3880-89 Name, Profile 39 (10 characters) r Range low to range high
3890-99 Name, Profile 40 (10 characters) 4009 Soak Step Time (hours)
Profile Edit Action — see Edit Profile Action r/w 0 to 99
4000 Profile Number 4010 Soak Step Time (minutes)
4100 Profile Number, Current Status r/w 0 o 59
4103 Profile Ramp Waiting, Current Status 4011 Soak Step Time (seconds)
1218 Profiles Remaining r/w 0 o 59
r 0-40 1217 Terminate a Profile, Key Press Simulation
4001 Profile Step Number w 1 Terminate
4101 Profile Step Number, Current Status 4021 Wait For Analog 1, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
1219 Profile Steps Remaining r/w 0 Don’t Wait
r 0-256 1 Wait
4003 Profile Step Type 4022 Wait For Analog 1, Value, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
r/w 1 Ramp Time r/w Range Low to Range High
2 Ramp Rate 4023 Wait For Analog 2, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
3 Soak r/w 0 Don’t Wait
4 Jump 1 Wait
5 End (read only)
4024 Wait For Analog 2, Value, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
4102 Profile Step Type, Current Status r/w Range Low to Range High
r 1 Ramp Time
2 Ramp Rate 4026 Wait For Analog 3 Value, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
3 Soak r/w Range Low to Range High
4 Jump 4025 Wait For Analog 3, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
5 End r/w 0 Don’t Wait
4108 Profile Waiting for Analog Input 1, Current Status 1 Wait
r 0 Don’t Wait 4013 Wait For Event 1, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
1 Wait r/w 0 Don’t Wait
4109 Profile Waiting for Analog Input 2, Current Status 1 Wait for Off
r 0 Don’t Wait 2 Wait for On
1 Wait 4014 Wait For Event 2, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
4110 Profile Waiting for Analog Input 3, Current Status r/w 0 Don’t Wait
r 0 Don’t Wait 1 Wait for Off
1 Wait 2 Wait for On
4104 Profile Waiting for Event 1, Current Status 4015 Wait For Event 3, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
r 0 Don’t Wait r/w 0 Don’t Wait
1 Wait for Off 1 Wait for Off
2 Wait for On 2 Wait for On
4105 Profile Waiting for Event 2, Current Status 4016 Wait For Event 4, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
1 Wait for Off 1 Wait for Off
2 Wait for On 2 Wait for On
4106 Profile Waiting for Event 3, Current Status 4012 Wait/Don’t Wait, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps
1 Wait for Off 1 Wait for
2 Wait for On
4107 Profile Waiting for Event 4, Current Status
r/w 0 Don’t Wait
1 Wait for Off
2 Wait for On
4044 Ramp Set Point Channel 1, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time Step
r/w Range low to range high
4045 Ramp Set Point Channel 2, Ramp Time Step
r/w Range low to range high
4009 Ramp Time (hours)
r/w 0 to 99
4010 Ramp Time (minutes)
r/w 0 o 59

Parameters Sorted by Modbus Register
0 Model, Diagnostics 517 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 616 Decimal Point, Analog Input 2
1 Serial Number, First Part, Diagnostics 520 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 617 Error Latching, Analog Input 2
2 Serial Number, Second Part, Diagnostics 521 Integral 1A , PID Set 3, Channel 1 618 Process Units, Analog Input 2
3 Software Number, Diagnostics 522 Reset 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 620 Sensor, Analog Input 3
4 Software Revision, Diagnostics 523 Derivative 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 621 Sensor Type, Analog Input 3
5 Mfg. Date, Diagnostics 524 Rate 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 622 Set Point Low Limit, Analog Input 3
8 Input 1 Type, Diagnostics 525 Dead Band 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 623 Set Point High Limit, Analog Input 3
9 Input 2 Type, Diagnostics 527 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 3, Channel 1 624 Filter Time, Analog Input 3
10 Input 3 Type, Diagnostics 530 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 625 Calibration Offset, Analog Input 3
16 Output 1A Type, Diagnostics 531 Integral 1A , PID Set 4, Channel 1 626 Decimal Point, Analog Input 3
17 Output 1B Type, Diagnostics 532 Reset 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 627 Error Latching, Analog Input 3
18 Output 2A Type, Diagnostics 533 Derivative 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 628 Process Units, Analog Input 3
19 Output 2B Type, Diagnostics 534 Rate 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 680 Scale Low, Analog Input 1
20 Retransmit 1 Type, Diagnostics 535 Dead Band 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 681 Scale High, Analog Input 1
21 Retransmit 2 Type, Diagnostics 537 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 4, Channel 1 682 Scale Low, Analog Input 2
25 Save Changes to EE 540 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1 683 Scale High, Analog Input 2
100 Input 1 Value, Status 541 Integral 1A , PID Set 5, Channel 1 684 Scale Low, Analog Input 3
101 Input 1 Error, Status 542 Reset 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1 685 Scale High, Analog Input 3
102 Alarm 1, Status 543 Derivative 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1 700 Function, Control Output 1A
103 % Power Output 1A, Status 544 Rate 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1 701 Process, Control Output 1A
104 Input 2 Value, Status 545 Dead Band 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1 702 Alarm Type, Alarm Output 1
105 Input 2 Error, Status 547 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 5, Channel 1 703 Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Output 1
106 Alarm 2 , Status 550 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 704 Alarm Latching, Alarm Output 1
107 % Power Output 1B, Status 551 Integral 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 705 Alarm Silencing, Alarm Output 1
108 Input 3 Value, Status 552 Reset 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 706 Alarm Sides, Alarm Output 1
109 Input 3 Error, Status 553 Derivative 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 707 Alarm Logic, Alarm Output 1
111 % Power Output 2A, Status 554 Rate 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 708 Alarm Messages, Alarm Output 1
115 % Power Output 2B, Status 555 Dead Band 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 709 Retransmit Source, Retransmit Output 1
200 Operation Mode, Status 556 Cycle Time value, Control Output 1B 710 Low Scale, Retransmit Output 1
201 Digital Input 1, Status 557 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 1, Channel 1 711 High Scale, Retransmit Output 1
210 Input 1 Open Loop, Status 559 Cycle Time Type, Control Output 1B 712 Scale Offset, Retransmit Output 1
213 Digital Input 2, Status 560 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1 714 High Power Limit, Control Output 1A
222 Input 2 Open Loop, Status 561 Integral 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1 715 Low Power Limit, Control Output 1A
225 Digital Input 3, Status 562 Reset 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1 716 Alarm Source, Alarm Output 1
237 Digital Input 4, Status 563 Derivative 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1 717 Function, Control Output 1B
300 Set Point 1, value 564 Rate 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1 718 Process, Control Output 1B
302 Alarm Low Set Point and Deviation, Alarm 565 Dead Band 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1 719 Alarm Type, Alarm Output 2
1, value 567 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 2, Channel 1 720 Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Output 2
303 Alarm High Set Point and Deviation, Alarm 570 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 721 Alarm Latching, Alarm Output 2
1, value 571 Integral 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 722 Alarm Silencing, Alarm Output 2
304 Autotune Set Point, Channel 1, value 572 Reset 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 723 Alarm Sides, Alarm Output 2
305 Autotune Channel 1 573 Derivative 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 724 Alarm Logic, Alarm Output 2
308 Idle Set Point, Channel 1, Power Out Action 574 Rate 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 725 Alarm Messages, Alarm Output 2
311 Clear Error 1, Key Press Simulation 575 Dead Band 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 726 Retransmit Source, Retransmit Output 2
312 Clear Alarm 1, Key Press Simulation 577 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 3, Channel 1 727 Low Scale, Retransmit Output 2
313 Silence Alarm 1, Key Press Simulation 580 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 728 High Scale, Retransmit Output 2
319 Set Point 2, value 581 Integral 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 729 Scale Offset, Retransmit Output 2
321 Alarm Low Set Point and Deviation, Alarm 582 Reset 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 731 High Power Limit, Control Output 1B
2, value 583 Derivative 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 732 Low Power Limit, Control Output 1B
322 Alarm High Set Point and Deviation, Alarm 584 Rate 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 733 Alarm Source, Alarm Output 2
2, value 585 Dead Band 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 734 Function, Control Output 2A
323 Autotune Set Point, Channel 2, value 587 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 4, Channel 1 735 Process, Control Output 2A
324 Autotune Channel 2 590 Proportional Band 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 748 High Power Limit, Control Output 2A
327 Idle Set Point, Channel 2, Power Out Action 591 Integral 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 749 Low Power Limit, Control Output 2A
330 Clear Error 2, Key Press Simulation 592 Reset 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 751 Function, Control Output 2B
331 Clear Alarm 2, Key Press Simulation 593 Derivative 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 752 Process, Control Output 2B
332 Silence Alarm 2, Key Press Simulation 594 Rate 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 765 High Power Limit, Control Output 2B
343 Autotune Cascade 595 Dead Band 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 766 Low Power Limit, Control Output 2B
349 Clear Error 3, Key Press Simulation 597 Hysteresis 1B, PID Set 5, Channel 1 836 Analog Range, Retransmit Output 1
500 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 600 Sensor, Analog Input 1 837 Analog Range, Retransmit Output 2
501 Integral 1A , PID Set 1, Channel 1 601 Sensor Type, Analog Input 1 900 PID Units, System
502 Reset 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 602 Set Point Low Limit, Analog Input 1 901 °F or °C, System
503 Derivative 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 603 Set Point High Limit, Analog Input 1 903 Input 1 Fail % Power, System
504 Rate 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 604 Filter Time, Analog Input 1 904 Open Loop Channel 1
505 Dead Band 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 605 Calibration Offset, Analog Input 1 906 Input 2 Fail % Power, System
506 Cycle Time value, Control Output 1A 606 Decimal Point, Analog Input 1 907 Open Loop Channel 2
507 Hysteresis 1A, PID Set 1, Channel 1 607 Error Latching, Analog Input 1 1060 Function, Digital Input 1
509 Cycle Time Type, Control Output 1A 608 Process Units, Analog Input 1 1061 Condition, Digital Input 1
510 Proportional Band 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 610 Sensor, Analog Input 2 1062 Function, Digital Input 2
511 Integral 1A , PID Set 2, Channel 1 611 Sensor Type, Analog Input 2 1063 Condition, Digital Input 2
512 Reset 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 612 Set Point Low Limit, Analog Input 2 1064 Function, Digital Input 3
513 Derivative 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 613 Set Point High Limit, Analog Input 2 1065 Condition, Digital Input 3
514 Rate 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 614 Filter Time, Analog Input 2 1066 Function, Digital Input 4
515 Dead Band 1A, PID Set 2, Channel 1 615 Calibration Offset, Analog Input 2 1067 Condition, Digital Input 4

1075 Digital Input 1, Start Profile 1925 Cascade Type 2564 Rate 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2
1076 Digital Input 1, Start Step 1926 Cascade, Range Low 2565 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2
1077 Digital Input 2, Start Profile 1927 Cascade, Range High 2567 Hysteresis 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2
1078 Digital Input 2, Start Step 2000 Digital Output 1, Condition 2570 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2
1079 Digital Input 3, Start Profile 2001 Function, Digital Output 1 2571 Integral 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2
1080 Digital Input 3, Start Step 2010 Digital Output 2, Condition 2572 Reset 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2
1081 Digital Input 4, Start Profile 2011 Function, Digital Output 2 2573 Derivative 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2
1082 Digital Input 4, Start Step 2020 Digital Output 3, Condition 2574 Rate 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2
1205 Guaranteed Soak Band, Channel 1 2021 Function, Digital Output 3 2575 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2
1206 Power-Out Action 2030 Digital Output 4, Condition 2577 Hysteresis 2B, PID Set 8, Channel 2
1209 Resume a Profile, Key Press Simulation 2031 Function, Digital Output 4 2580 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2
1210 Hold a Profile, Key Press Simulation 2040 Digital Output 5, Condition 2581 Integral 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2
1212 Guaranteed Soak Band, Channel 2 2041 Function, Digital Output 5 2582 Reset 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2
1213 Power-Out Time 2046 Complementary Output, Digital Output 5 2583 Derivative 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2
1217 Terminate a Profile, Key Press Simulation 2050 Digital Output 6, Condition 2584 Rate 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2
1218 Profiles Remaining 2051 Function, Digital Output 6 2585 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2
1219 Profile Steps Remaining 2052 Boost Heat % Power, Digital Output 6 2587 Hysteresis 2B, PID Set 9, Channel 2
1220 Guaranteed Soak Band 1 Source 2054 Boost Heat Delay On Time, Digital Output 6 2590 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
1221 Guaranteed Soak Band 2 Source 2060 Digital Output 7, Condition 2591 Integral 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
1300 Set Point, Lockout 2061 Function, Digital Output 7 2592 Reset 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
1302 Setup Page, Lockout 2062 Boost Cool % Power, Digital Output 7 2593 Derivative 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
1303 Factory Page, Lockout 2064 Boost Cool Delay On Time, Digital Output 7 2594 Rate 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
1306 Autotune PID, Lockout 2070 Digital Output 8, Condition 2595 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
1307 Edit PID, Lockout 2071 Function, Digital Output 8 2597 Hysteresis 2B, PID Set 10, Channel 2
1308 Alarm Set Point, Lockout 2072 Compressor On % Power, Digital Output 8 2600 Proportional Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 1,
1309 Profiles, Lockout 2073 Compressor Off % Power, Digital Output 8 Channel 1
1315 Clear Locks 2074 Compressor On Delay, Digital Output 8 2601 Integral 1A , Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1330-33 Set Password 2075 Compressor Off Delay, Digital Output 8 2602Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1400-15 Custom Main Page Parameters (P1 to P16) 2500 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2603 Derivative 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1500 CJC1 Temp, Diagnostics 2501 Integral 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2604 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1501 CJC1 AtoD, Diagnostics 2502 Reset 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2605 Dead Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1504 Input 1 AtoD, Diagnostics 2503 Derivative 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2607 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1505 Input 2 AtoD, Diagnostics 2504 Rate 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2610 Proportional Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 2,
1506 Input 3 AtoD, Diagnostics 2505 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 Channel 1
1513 Display Test, Test 2506 Cycle Time Value, Control Output 2A 2611 Integral 1A , Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1514 Test Outputs, Test 2507 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2612 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1515 Line Frequency, Diagnostics 2509 Cycle Time (type), Control Output 2A 2613 Derivative 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1531 CJC2 Temp, Diagnostics 2510 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2614 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1532 CJC2 AtoD, Diagnostics 2511 Integral 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2615 Dead Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1601 Restore Factory Calibration 2512 Reset 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2617 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1602 Full Defaults 2513 Derivative 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2620 Proportional Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 3,
1603 Input 1, Calibrate 2514 Rate 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 Channel 1
1604 Process Output 1A, 4.000mA, Calibrate 2515 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2621 Integral 1A , Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
1605 Process Output 1A, 20.000mA, Calibrate 2517 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2622 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
1606 Process Output 1A, 1.000V, Calibrate 2520 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 2623 Derivative 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
1607 Process Output 1A, 10.000V, Calibrate 2521 Integral 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 2624 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
1608 Input 2, Calibrate 2522 Reset 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 2625 Dead Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
1609 Process Output 1B, 4.000mA, Calibrate 2523 Derivative 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 2627 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1
1610 Process Output 1B, 20.000mA, Calibrate 2524 Rate 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 2630 Proportional Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 4,
1611 Process Output 1B, 1.000V, Calibrate 2525 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 Channel 1
1612 Process Output 1B, 10.000V, Calibrate 2527 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 8, Channel 2 2631 Integral 1A , Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
1613 Input 3, Calibrate 2530 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 2632 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
1614 Process Output 2A, 4.000mA, Calibrate 2531 Integral 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 2633 Derivative 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
1615 Process Output 2A, 20.000mA, Calibrate 2532 Reset 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 2634 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
1616 Process Output 2A, 1.000V, Calibrate 2533 Derivative 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 2635 Dead Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
1617 Process Output 2A, 10.000V, Calibrate 2534 Rate 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 2637 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1
1619 Process Output 2B, 4.000mA, Calibrate 2535 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 2640 Proportional Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 5,
1620 Process Output 2B, 20.000mA, Calibrate 2537 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 9, Channel 2 Channel 1
1621 Process Output 2B, 1.000V, Calibrate 2540 Proportional Band 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 2641 Integral 1A , Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
1622 Process Output 2B, 10.000V, Calibrate 2541 Integral 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 2642 Reset 1A, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
1624 Retransmit Output 1, 4.000mA, Calibrate 2542 Reset 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 2643 Derivative 1A, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
1625 Retransmit Output 1, 20.000mA, Calibrate 2543 Derivative 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 2644 Rate 1A, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
1626 Retransmit Output 1, 1.000V, Calibrate 2544 Rate 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 2645 Dead Band 1A, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
1627 Retransmit Output 1, 10.000V, Calibrate 2545 Dead Band 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 2647 Hysteresis 1A, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1
1629 Retransmit Output 2, 4.000mA, Calibrate 2547 Hysteresis 2A, PID Set 10, Channel 2 2650 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 1,
1630 Retransmit Output 2, 20.000mA, Calibrate 2550 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 Channel 1
1631 Retransmit Output 2, 1.000V, Calibrate 2551 Integral 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2651 Integral 1B , Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1632 Retransmit Output 2, 10.000V, Calibrate 2552 Reset 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2652 Reset 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1902 Altitude, Analog Input 2 2553 Derivative 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2653 Derivative 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1915 Cascade, Analog Input 3 2554 Rate 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2654 Rate 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1916 Current Time, Hour 2555 Dead Band 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2655 Dead Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1917 Current Time, Minutes 2556 Cycle Time Value, Control Output 2B 2657 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 1, Channel 1
1918 Current Time, Seconds 2557 Hysteresis 2B, PID Set 6, Channel 2 2660 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 2,
1919 Current Date, Month 2559 Cycle Time (type), Control Output 2B Channel 1
1920 Current Date, Day 2560 Proportional Band 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2661 Integral 1B , Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1921 Current Date, Year 2561 Integral 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2662 Reset 1B, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1922 Cascade Inner Set Point 2562 Reset 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2663 Derivative 1B, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1
1923 Show °F or °C 2563 Derivative 2B, PID Set 7, Channel 2 2664 Rate 1B, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 1

2665 Dead Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 3770-79 Name, Profile 28 (10 characters) Ramp Time or Soak Steps
1 3780-89 Name, Profile 29 (10 characters) 4049 Guaranteed Soak Channel 2, Ramp Rate or
2667 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 2, Channel 3790-99 Name, Profile 30 (10 characters) Ramp Time or Soak Steps
1 3800-09 Name, Profile 31 (10 characters) 4050 Jump to Profile, Jump Step
2670 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, 3810-19 Name, Profile 32 (10 characters) 4051 Jump to Step, Jump Step
Channel 1 3820-29 Name, Profile 33 (10 characters) 4052 Jump Repeats, Jump Step
2671 Integral 1B , Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1 3830-39 Name, Profile 34 (10 characters) 4060 End Action, End Step
2672 Reset 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1 3840-49 Name, Profile 35 (10 characters) 4061 End Idle Setpoint Channel 1, End Step
2673 Derivative 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 3850-59 Name, Profile 36 (10 characters) 4062 End Idle Setpoint Channel 2, End Step
1 3860-69 Name, Profile 37 (10 characters) 4100 Profile Number, Current Status
2674 Rate 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 1 3870-79 Name, Profile 38 (10 characters) 4101 Profile Step Number, Current Status
2675 Dead Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 3880-89 Name, Profile 39 (10 characters) 4102 Profile Step Type, Current Status
1 3890-99 Name, Profile 40 (10 characters) 4103 Profile Ramp Waiting, Current Status
2677 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 3, Channel 4000 Profile Number 4104 Profile Waiting for Event 1, Current Status
1 4001 Profile Step Number 4105 Profile Waiting for Event 2, Current Status
2680 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, 4002 Profile Edit Action 4106 Profile Waiting for Event 3, Current Status
Channel 1 4003 Profile Step Type 4107 Profile Waiting for Event 4, Current Status
2681 Integral 1B , Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1 4004 Autostart Profile Date or Day 4108 Profile Waiting for Analog Input 1, Current
2682 Reset 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1 4005 Autostart, Date (month) Status
2683 Derivative 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 4006 Autostart, Date (day) 4109 Profile Waiting for Analog Input 2, Current
1 4007 Autostart, Date (year) Status
2684 Rate 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 1 4008 Autostart, Day (of week) 4110 Profile Waiting for Analog Input 3, Current
2685 Dead Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 4009 Autostart Time (hours) Status
1 4010 Autostart Time (minutes) 4111 Digital Output 1, Current Status
2687 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 4, Channel 4011 Autostart Time (seconds) 4112 Digital Output 2, Current Status
1 4009 Ramp Time (hours) 4113 Digital Output 3, Current Status
2690 Proportional Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, 4010 Ramp Time (minutes) 4114 Digital Output 4, Current Status
Channel 1 4011 Ramp Time (seconds) 4115 Digital Output 5, Current Status
2691 Integral 1B , Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1 4009 Soak Step Time (hours) 4116 Digital Output 6, Current Status
2692 Reset 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1 4010 Soak Step Time (minutes) 4117 Digital Output 7, Current Status
2693 Derivative 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 4011 Soak Step Time (seconds) 4118 Digital Output 8, Current Status
1 4012 Wait/Don’t Wait, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 4119 Hours Remaining, Ramp Time or Soak
2694 Rate 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 1 or Soak Steps Step, Current Profile Status
2695 Dead Band 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 4013 Wait For Event 1, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 4120 Minutes Remaining, Ramp Time or Soak
1 or Soak Steps Step, Current Profile Status
2697 Hysteresis 1B, Cascade PID Set 5, Channel 4014 Wait For Event 2, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 4121 Seconds Remaining, Ramp Time or Soak
1 or Soak Steps Step, Current Profile Status
3000-06 Name, Digital Input 1 (7 characters) 4015 Wait For Event 3, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 4122 Set Point Channel 1, Ramp Rate, Ramp Time
3010-16 Name, Digital Input 2 (7 characters) or Soak Steps or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3020-26 Name, Digital Input 3 (7 characters) 4016 Wait For Event 4, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 4123 Set Point Channel 2, Ramp Rate, Ramp Time
3030-36 Name, Digital Input 4 (7 characters) or Soak Steps or Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3100-09 Name, Digital Output 1 (10 characters) 4021 Wait For Analog 1, Ramp Rate or Ramp 4124 Channel 1 PID, Ramp Rate, Ramp Time or
3110-19 Name, Digital Output 2 (10 characters) Time or Soak Steps Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3120-29 Name, Digital Output 3 (10 characters) 4022 Wait For Analog 1, Value, Ramp Rate or 4125 Channel 2 PID Set, Ramp Rate, Ramp Time or
3130-39 Name, Digital Output 4 (10 characters) Ramp Time or Soak Steps Soak Step, Current Profile Status
3140-49 Name, Digital Output 5 (10 characters) 4023 Wait For Analog 2, Ramp Rate or Ramp 4126 Jump Count, Current Profile Status
3150-59 Name, Digital Output 6 (10 characters) Time or Soak Steps 4127 Jump Profile, Current Profile Status
3160-69 Name, Digital Output 7 (10 characters) 4024 Wait For Analog 2, Value, Ramp Rate or 4128 Jump Step, Current Profile Status
3170-79 Name, Digital Output 8 (10 characters) Ramp Time or Soak Steps 4129 End Set Point Channel 1, Current Profile
3200-09 Name, Alarm 1 (10 characters) 4025 Wait For Analog 3, Ramp Rate or Ramp Status
3210-19 Name, Alarm 2 (10 characters) Time or Soak Steps 4130 End Set Point Channel 2, Current Profile
3500-09 Name, Profile 1 (10 characters) 4026 Wait For Analog 3 Value, Ramp Rate or Status
3510-19 Name, Profile 2 (10 characters) Ramp Time or Soak Steps 4501-18 Custom Message 1
3520-29 Name, Profile 3 (10 characters) 4030 Event Output 1, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 4521-38 Custom Message 2
3530-39 Name, Profile 4 (10 characters) or Soak Steps 4541-58 Custom Message 3
3540-49 Name, Profile 5 (10 characters) 4031 Event Output 2, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 4561-78 Custom Message 4
3550-59 Name, Profile 6 (10 characters) or Soak Steps 5500 Process Display
3560-69 Name, Profile 7 (10 characters) 4032 Event Output 3, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 5501 Process Display Input 1, Time
3570-79 Name, Profile 8 (10 characters) or Soak Steps 5502 Process Display Input 2, Time
3580-89 Name, Profile 9 (10 characters) 4033 Event Output 4, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time 5503 Process Display Input 3, Time
3590-99 Name, Profile 10 (10 characters) or Soak Steps
3600-09 Name, Profile 11 (10 characters) 4034 Event Output 5, Ramp Rate or Ramp Time
3650-59 Name, Profile 16 (10 characters) or Soak Steps ✔ NOTE:
For more information about
3680-89 Name, Profile 19 (10 characters) 4043 Rate, Ramp Rate Step parameters, see the Index.
3690-99 Name, Profile 20 (10 characters) 4044 Ramp Setpoint Channel 1, Ramp Rate or
3700-09 Name, Profile 21 (10 characters) Ramp Time Step
3710-19 Name, Profile 22 (10 characters) 4045 Ramp Setpoint Channel 2, Ramp Time Step
3720-29 Name, Profile 23 (10 characters) 4046 Channel 1 PID Set, Ramp Rate or Ramp
3730-39 Name, Profile 24 (10 characters) Time or Soak Steps
3740-49 Name, Profile 25 (10 characters) 4047 Channel 2 PID Set, Ramp Rate or Ramp
3750-59 Name, Profile 26 (10 characters) Time or Soak Steps
3760-69 Name, Profile 27 (10 characters) 4048 Guaranteed Soak Channel 1, Ramp Rate or

Communications Page Parameter Table Modbus
Register
Communications
Main > Setup > Communications
Baud Rate 19200 19200 No Modbus Active: Always.

Set the transmission 9600 address.
speed in bits/seconds.
Address 1 to 247 1 No Modbus Active: Always.

Set the controller’s ad- address.
dress between 1 and
247.
NOTE: For more information about how parameter settings


F4 Modbus Applications:
Profile Programming Procedures
F4 Modbus Applications: Profile Overview
A maximum of 40 files may be created, with a total of 256 steps. Each time a new file is creat-
ed, the file is placed after the previously created file. As files are deleted, newly created files
are placed into these locations. Modbus Register 4000 returns the file number of the newly
created file.
*Profiles without custom-written names are referred to
by their numbers (Profile 1, Profile 2, etc.),

F4 Modbus Applications: Creating a Profile
Set File Number Assumes file does not exist

Write Modbus Register Use 1 to 40
4000=1 to 40 File will be placed at lowest
empty file location.
Create Profile -Optional- Set Current Step Number Insert Step

Write Modbus Register Rename Profile* Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register
4002=1 Registers 3500 thru 3899 4001=1 to 256 4002=2
Step Type No Step Type No Step Type No Step Type No Step Type
"Autostart"? "Time"? "Rate"? "Soak"? "Jump"?
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
See "Autostart" See "Time" See "Rate" See "Soak" See "Jump"
Step Type sheet Step Type sheet Step Type sheet Step Type sheet Step Type sheet
for options for options for options for options for options
Done with No
profile?
Yes
Set Step Number to where

the "End" step is located
Write Modbus Register
4001=1 to 255
See "End"
Step Type sheet Done
for options
*Profiles without custom-written names are referred to by

their numbers (Profile 1, Profile 2, etc.),

F4 Modbus Applications: Autostart Step
Set Step Type to

"Autostart"
Write Modbus Register
4003=0
0= Every Day
1= Sunday
2= Monday
Start on a Set "Day" Flag Enter Day of week 3= Tuesday
Date or Day Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register
Day? 4004=1 4008=0 to 7 4= Wednesday
5= Thursday
6= Friday
Date 7= Saturday
Set "Date" Flag

Write Modbus Register Enter Hour 24 Hour
4004=0 Write Modbus Register Clock
4009=0 to 23
Format
1= Jan
.
Enter Month to Start Profile
Write Modbus Register . Enter Minute
4005=1 to 12 . Write Modbus Register
4010=0 to 59
12 = Dec
Enter Day to Start Profile

Write Modbus Register Enter Second
4006=1 to 31 Write Modbus Register
4011=0 to 59
Enter Year to Start Profile

Write Modbus Register Save Changes
4007=1998 to 2035 Write Modbus Register Done
25=0
Autostart pauses a profile until the specified date or day, and time (of a 24-hour-
clock).

F4 Modbus Applications: Ramp Time, Ramp Rate, Soak Steps (page 1 of 3)
Digital inputs must be configured as Events before profiling: “Digital Input 1 to 4 Function =
Wait for Event” and “Digital Input 1 to 4 Condition = Low or High.” Modbus Registers 1060
through 1067. See Setup Page Map.

Analog inputs and digital outputs must be configured before programming a profile. See Setup
Page Map.


F4 Modbus Applications: F4 Modbus Applications:
Jump Step End Step
Jump initiates another step or profile. File

must exist at location specified.

F4 Modbus Applications: Editing, Deleting, Starting a Profile

F4 Modbus Applications: Naming a Profile
Profiles without custom-written names are referred to by their numbers (Profile 1, Profile 2,
etc.). Follow this procedure to customize the profile name, using ASCII-equivalent decimal
codes (in the column labeled “Dec” in the chart below).
Renaming a Profile - F4
via Modbus Communication
Determine file number to

Name - See list on right
Modbus
Register File #
xxxx=
3500 - 3509 1
3510 - 3519 2
3520 - 3529 3
3530 - 3539 4
3540 - 3549 5
Write to Modbus Register
xxxx=File Name Character 3550 - 3559 6
using decimal equivalent 3560 - 3569 7
3570 - 3579 8
3580 - 3589 9
File Name 3590 - 3599 10
Character Dec 3600 - 3609 11
blank 32 3610 - 3619 12
0 48 3620 - 3629 13
1 49 3630 - 3639 14
2 50 3640 - 3649 15
Have 10
Next
characters 3 51 3650 - 3659 16
Char 3660 - 3669 17
been 4 52
written? 5 53 3670 - 3679 18
6 54 3680 - 3689 19
7 55 3690 - 3699 20
8 56 3700 - 3709 21
No
9 57 3710 - 3719 22
A 65 3720 - 3729 23
B 66 3730 - 3739 24
C 67 3740 - 3749 25
Yes 3750 - 3759 26
Next Modbus Register D 68
E 69 3760 - 3769 27
F 70 3770 - 3779 28
G 71 3780 - 3789 29
H 72 3790 - 3799 30
I 73 3800 - 3809 31
J 74 3810 - 3819 32
K 75 3820 - 3829 33
Save Changes L 76 3830 - 3839 34
Write Modbus Register 3840 - 3849 35
M 77
25=0
N 78 3850 - 3859 36
O 79 3860 - 3869 37
P 80 3870 - 3879 38
Q 81 3880 - 3889 39
R 82 3890 - 3899 40
S 83
T 84 Note: There are ten
Done U 85 Modbus Registers for
V 86 each profile name.
W 87
X 88
Y 89
Z 90

F4 Modbus Applications: Monitor Current Step
Assumes controller is configured

for functions read - you can’t read
a digital output if it doesn’t exist.

8
Chapter Eight: Security and Locks
Overview
The Series F4 allows users to set separate security • Password (operators can enter and change
levels for the Static Set Point prompt on the Main settings after entering a password); and
Page, for all menus on the Operations Page, as well • Hidden (operators cannot see the menu or
as for the Profiles Page, Setup Page and Factory page — it is not displayed). Set Point settings
Page. Four levels of security are available: cannot be Hidden.
• Full Access (operators can enter and change Full Access is the default for all menus. Unless you
settings); change the level of access, operators will be able to
• Read Only (operators can read but not change read and change every setting in every menu in the
settings); Series F4 software.
Set Lock Levels

To set levels of security, go to “Set Lockout,” on the Main>Factory________ .
Factory Page. Press the Right Key .. This menu >Set Lockout
lists the menus for which access can be limited: Diagnostic
• Set Point on Main Page Test
• Operations Page Autotune PID
• Operations Page Edit PID
…Factory>Set Lock___ .
Set Point
• Operations Page Alarm Set Point >Oper. Autotune PID ■
• Profiles Page Oper. Edit PID ▼
• Setup Page
…Lock>Autotune PID___
• Factory Page Full Access
After choosing the item to lock out, press . and Read Only
choose the level of access: Full, Read Only, >Password
Password or Hidden. If you choose Password, you
must set the password — see below.
✔ NOTE:
Full Access is the default for all menus. Unless you
change the level of access, operators will be able to read
and change every setting in every menu in the Series F4
software.
✔ NOTE:
Watlow Series F4S/D Security and Locks ■ 8.1

Enter a Password >
Must have password
If you try to set password security before any before choosing the
password has been established, a pop-up message password lock!
will give you the opportunity to enter one. Use the ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
. , > < keys to enter a four-character
password, which can consist of letters, numbers or Must reset lock
both. After entering and confirming the password, after setting the
re-enter the chosen menu or page and select password
Password Security. Record your password and keep
■ ■ ■ Press any key!■ ■ ■
it secure.
Enter New Password:
_ _ _ _
▲▼ Adjusts Char
▲
▼
Save Changes
Confirm Password:
_ _ _ _
▲▼ Adjusts Char
▲
▼
Save Changes
Use a Password Invalid, Re-Enter:____

To enter a password-protected area, users must
▲▼ Adjusts Char
enter the password. If an incorrect password is
Save Changes
▲
▼
entered, a pop-up message will tell you it is invalid

and you may try again. When the password is
correct, choose again to enter the menu or page of
your choice.
Change a Password …Factory>Set Lock___ .

Setup ▲
The Change Password parameter is near the end of Factory ■
the list under Set Lockout on the Factory Page. To >Change Password ▼
change a password, you must first enter the old
password for confirmation. Enter Password:
_ _ _ _
▲▼ Adjusts Char
▲
▼
Save Changes
Set Lockout Menu Map

Set Point
Oper. Autotune PID
Oper Edit PID
Oper. Alarm SP
Profile
Setup
Factory
Change Password
Clear Locks
8.2 ■ Security and Locks Watlow Series F4S/D

Set Lockout Menu Parameter Table Modbus
Register
Set Lockout
Main > Factory > Set Lock
Set Point Full Access (0) Full Access 1300 r/w Active: Always.
Set the set point Read Only (1)
access level.
Operations, Autotune PID Full Access (0) Full Access 1306 r/w Active: Always.
Limit access to this Read Only (1)
menu. Password (2)
Hidden (3)
Operations, Edit PID Full Access (0) Full Access 1307 r/w Active: Always.
menu. Password (2)
Hidden (3)
Operations, Alarm Set Point Full Access (0) Full Access 1308 r/w Active: Always.
menu. Password (2)
Hidden (3)
Profile Page Full Access (0) Full Access 1309 r/w Active: Always.
page. Password (2)
Hidden (3)
Setup Page Full Access (0) Full Access 1302 r/w Active: Always.
page. Password (2)
Hidden (3)
Factory Page Full Access (0) Full Access 1303 r/w Active: Always.
page. Password (2)
Set/Change Password Yes (0) 1314 r/w Active: Always.

Reset or change No (1)
password. Choose
Yes to change the
password.
Clear Locks Yes (0) 1315 w
Unlock set point
and all pages and
menus.
NOTE: For more information about how parameter settings

Watlow Series F4S/D Security and Locks ■ 8.3

Notes
8.4 ■ Security and Locks Watlow Series F4S/D

9
Chapter Nine: Calibration
Thermocouple Input Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2
RTD Input Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2
Voltage Process Input Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3
Current Process Input Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3
Process Output Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4
Retransmit Output Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.5
Calibration Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6
Factory Page Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7
Overview
The Calibration Menu on the Factory Page allows
calibration of inputs and outputs. Calibration pro-
cedures should be done only by qualified technical
personnel with access to the equipment listed in
each section.
Before beginning calibration procedures, warm up
the controller for at least 20 minutes.
Restore Factory Values

Each controller is calibrated before leaving
the factory. If at any time you want to restore the
factory calibration values, use the last parameters
in the menu: Restore In x (1 to 3) Cal. Press . .
No special equipment is necessary.
✔ NOTE:
To see how all the pages, menus and parameters are
grouped, refer to the inside back cover of this manual.
✔ NOTE:
Watlow Series F4 Calibration ■ 9.1

Calibrating the Series F4
Thermocouple Input Procedure RTD Input Procedure
Equipment Equipment
• Type J reference compensator with reference • 1kΩ decade box with 0.01Ω resolution.
junction at 32°F (0°C), or type J thermocouple
calibrator to 32°F (0°C). Input x (1 to 3) Setup and Calibration
• Precision millivolt source, 0 to 50mV minimum 1. Connect the correct power supply to terminals
range, 0.002mV resolution. 1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the
Appendix).
Input x (1 to 3) Setup and Calibration 2. Short Input 1 terminals 60, 61 and 62; Input 2
1. Connect the correct power supply to terminals terminals 54, 57 and 58; or Input 3 terminals
1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the 52, 55 and 56 together with less than 0.1Ω.
Appendix). Press the Right Key . once at the Calibrate
2. Connect the millivolt source to Input 1 termi- Input x (1 to 3) prompt. At the Ground prompt
nals 62 (-) and 61 (+), Input 2 terminals 58 (-) press . once and to store ground input press
and 57 (+), or Input 3 terminals 56 (-) and 55 the Up Key > once.
(+), with copper wire. 3. Short Input 1 terminals 60 and 61; Input 2 ter-
3. Enter 50.000mV from the millivolt source. Al- minals 54 and 57; or Input 3 terminals 52 and
low at least 10 seconds to stabilize. Press the 55 together with less than 0.5Ω. Press . once
Right Key . once at the Calibrate Input x (1 at the Calibrate Input x (1 to 3) prompt. At the
to 3) prompt (Factory Page). At the 50.00mV Lead prompt press . once and to store lead
prompt press . once and to store 50.00mV resistance press > once.
press the Up Key > once. 4. Connect the decade box to Input 1 terminals 60
4. Enter 0.000mV from the millivolt source. Allow (S2), 61 (S1) and 62 (S3); Input 2 terminals 54
at least 10 seconds to stabilize. At the 0.00mV (S2), 57 (S1) and 58 (S3); or Input 3 terminals
prompt press . once and to store 0.00mV 52 (S2), 55 (S1) and 56 (S3), with 20- to 24-
press > once. gauge wire.
5. Disconnect the millivolt source and connect the 5. For 100Ω RTD, enter 15.00Ω. For 500Ω or 1kΩ
reference compensator or thermocouple calibra- RTD, enter 240.00Ω. Allow at least 10 seconds
tor to Input 1 terminals 62 (-) and 61 (+) or In- to stabilize. Press . once at the Calibrate In-
put 2 or 3 terminals 58 (-) and 57 (+). With type put x (1 to 3) prompt (Factory Page). At the
J thermocouple wire, if using a compensator, 15.00Ω or 240.00Ω* prompt press . once and
turn it on and short the input wires. When us- to store the 15.00Ω or 240.00Ω input press > once.
ing a type J calibrator, set it to simulate 32°F 6. For 100Ω RTD, enter 380.00Ω. For 500Ω or 1kΩ
(0°C). Allow 10 seconds for the controller to sta- RTD, enter 6080.00Ω. Allow at least 10 seconds
bilize. Press . once at the Calibrate Input x (1 to stabilize. Press . once at the Calibrate In-
or 2) prompt (Factory Page). At the 32°F Type J put x (1 to 3) prompt. At the 380.0Ω or
prompt press . once and to store type J ther- 6080.00Ω* prompt press . once and to store
mocouple calibration press > once. the 380.00Ω or 6080.00Ω input press > once.
6. Rewire for operation and verify calibration. 7. Rewire for operation and verify calibration.
✔ NOTE: *The tenth character of your model number determines

You need the equipment listed and technical skills. Con- what prompts appear and what input resistance values to
trollers come calibrated from the factory. Recalibrate only use for the RTD calibration.
for other agency requirements or if temperatures aren’t ac- F4_ _-_ _ _ _-_(1 to 4)RG: 15.00 and 380.00Ω
curate as verified by another calibrated instrument. F4_ _-_ _ _ _-_(5 to 8)RG: 240.00 and 6080.00Ω
9.2 ■ Calibration Watlow Series F4S/D

Press . once at the Calibrate Input 3 prompt
Voltage Process Input Procedure (Factory Page). At the 10.000V prompt press .
once and to store the 10.000V input press >
Equipment
once.
• Precision voltage source, 0 to 10V minimum
11. Rewire for operation and verify calibration.
range, with 0.001V resolution.
Input x (1 to 3) Setup and Calibration Current Process Input Procedure

1. Connect the correct power supply to terminals
1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the Equipment
Appendix). • Precision current source, 0 to 20mA range, with
Input 1 0.01mA resolution.
2. Connect the voltage source to terminals 59 (+)
and 62 (-) of the controller. Input x (1 to 3) Setup and Calibration
3. Enter 0.000V from the voltage source to the 1. Connect the correct power supply to terminals
controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize. 1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the
Press the Right Key . once at the Calibrate Appendix).
Input 1 prompt. At the 0.000V prompt press . Input 1
once and to store the 0.000V input press the Up
Key > once. 2. Connect the current source to terminals 60 (+)
and 62 (-).
4. Enter 10.000V from the voltage source to the
controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize. 3. Enter 4.000mA from the current source to the
Press . once at the Calibrate Input 1 prompt. controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize.
At the 10.000V prompt press . once and to Press the Right Key . once at the Calibrate
store the 10.000V input press > once. Input 1 prompt. At the 4.000mA prompt press
. once and to store 4.000mA press the Up Key
Input 2 > once.
5. Connect the voltage source to terminals 53 (+) 4. Enter 20.000mA from the current source to the
and 58 (-) of the controller. controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize.
6. Enter 0.000V from the voltage source to the Press . once at the Calibrate Input 1 prompt.
controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize. At the 20.000mA prompt press . once and to
Press . once at the Calibrate Input 2 prompt. store 20.000mA press > once.
At the 0.000V prompt press . once and to Input 2
store the 0.000V input press > once.
5. Connect the current source to terminals 54 (+)
7. Enter 10.000V from the voltage source to the and 58 (-).
controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize.
Press . once at the Calibrate Input 2 prompt 6. Enter 4.00mA from the current source to the
(Factory Page). At the 10.000V prompt press . controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize.
once and to store the 10.000V input press > Press . once at the Calibrate Input 2 prompt.
once. At the 4.000mA prompt press . once and to
store 4.000mA press > once.
Input 3 7. Enter 20.00mA from the current source to the
8. Connect the voltage source to terminals 51 (+) controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize.
and 56 (-) of the controller. Press . once at the Calibrate Input 2 prompt.
9. Enter 0.000V from the voltage source to the At the 20.000mA prompt press . once and to
controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize. store 20.000mA press > once.
Press . once at the Calibrate Input 3 prompt. Input 3
At the 0.000V prompt press . once and to
store the 0.000V input press > once. 8. Connect the voltage source to terminals 52 (+)
and 56 (-) of the controller.
10. Enter 10.000V from the voltage source to the
controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize. 9. Enter 4.000mA from the current source to the
controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize.
Watlow Series F4S/D Calibration ■ 9.3

Press . once at the Calibrate Input 3 prompt. 7. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out-
At the 4.000mA prompt press . once and to put 1A prompt. At the 10.000V prompt press .
store the 4.000mA input press > once. once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key <
10. Enter 20.000mA from the current source to the to adjust the display to the reading on the
controller. Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize. volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize
Press . once at the Calibrate Input 3 prompt within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme-
(Factory Page). At the 20.000mA prompt press ter reads 10.000V. Press . to store the value.
. once and to store the 20.000mA input press 8. Rewire for operation and verify calibration.
> once.
11. Rewire for operation and verify calibration. Output 1B Setup and Calibration
1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the
Process Output Procedure Appendix).
Milliamperes
Equipment
2. Connect the volt/ammeter to terminals 39 (+)
• Precision volt/ammeter with 3.5-digit resolu-
and 40 (-).
tion.
3. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out-
Output 1A Setup and Calibration put 1B prompt. At the 4.000mA prompt press .
once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key <
1. Connect the correct power supply to terminals to adjust the display to the reading on the
1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize
Appendix). within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme-
Milliamperes ter reads 4.000mA. Press . to store the value.
2. Connect the volt/ammeter to terminals 42 (+) 4. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out-
and 43 (-). put 1B prompt. At the 20.000mA prompt press
3. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out- . once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key
put 1A prompt. At the 4.000mA prompt press . < to adjust the display to the reading on the
once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key < volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize
to adjust the display to the reading on the within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme-
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize ter reads 20.000mA. Press . to store the val-
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- ue.
ter reads 4.000mA. Press . to store the value. Volts
4. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out- 5. Connect the volt/ammeter to terminals 41 (+)
put 1A prompt. At the 20.000mA prompt press and 40 (-).
. once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key 6. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out-
< to adjust the display to the reading on the put 1B prompt. At the 1.000V prompt press .
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key <
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- to adjust the display to the reading on the
ter reads 20.000mA. Press . to store the val- volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize
ue. within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme-
Volts ter reads 1.000V. Press . to store the value.
and 43 (-). put 1B prompt. At the 10.000V prompt press .
6. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out- once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key <
put 1A prompt. At the 1.000V prompt press . to adjust the display to the reading on the
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize ter reads 10.000V. Press . to store the value.
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- 8. Rewire for operation and verify calibration.
ter reads 1.000V. Press . to store the value.

Output 2A Setup and Calibration put 2B prompt. At the 4.000mA prompt press .
1. Connect the correct power supply to terminals to adjust the display to the reading on the
1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize
Appendix). within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme-
Milliamperes ter reads 4.000mA. Press . to store the value.
and 37 (-). put 2B prompt. At the 20.000mA prompt press
put 2A prompt. At the 4.000mA prompt press . < to adjust the display to the reading on the
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize ter reads 20.000mA. Press . to store the val-
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- ue.
ter reads 4.000mA. Press . to store the value. Volts
4. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out- 5. Connect the volt/ammeter to terminals 35 (+)
put 2A prompt. At the 20.000mA prompt press and 34 (-).
. once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key 6. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out-
< to adjust the display to the reading on the put 2B prompt. At the 1.000V prompt press .
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key <
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- to adjust the display to the reading on the
ter reads 20.000mA. Press . to store the val- volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize
ue. within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme-
Volts ter reads 1.000V. Press . to store the value.
and 37 (-). put 2B prompt. At the 10.000V prompt press .
6. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out- once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key <
put 2A prompt. At the 1.000V prompt press . to adjust the display to the reading on the
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize ter reads 10.000V. Press . to store the value.
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- 8. Rewire for operation and verify calibration.
7. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Out-
put 2A prompt. At the 10.000V prompt press . Retransmit Output Procedure
to adjust the display to the reading on the Equipment
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize • Precision volt/ammeter with 3.5-digit resolu-
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- tion.
8. Rewire for operation and verify calibration. Retransmit 1 Setup and Calibration
Output 2B Setup and Calibration 1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the
1. Connect the correct power supply to terminals Appendix).
1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the Milliamperes
Appendix).
Milliamperes and 49 (-).
2. Connect the volt/ammeter to terminals 33 (+) 3. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate
and 34 (-). Rexmit 1 prompt. At the 4.000mA prompt press

< to adjust the display to the reading on the 1, 2 and 3 (see the Wiring Chapter and the
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize Appendix).
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- Milliamperes
ter reads 4.000mA. Press . to store the value.
4. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate and 46 (-).
Rexmit 1 prompt. At the 20.000mA prompt
press . once. Use the Up Key > or the Down 3. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate
Key < to adjust the display to the reading on Rexmit 2 prompt. At the 4.000mA prompt press
the volt/ammeter. The controller should stabi- . once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key
lize within one second. Repeat until the < to adjust the display to the reading on the
volt/ammeter reads 20.000mA. Press . to volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize
store the value. within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme-
ter reads 4.000mA. Press . to store the value.
Volts
4. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate
5. Connect the volt/ammeter to terminals 48 (+) Rexmit 2 prompt. At the 20.000mA prompt
and 49 (-). press . once. Use the Up Key > or the Down
6. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate Key < to adjust the display to the reading on
Rexmit 1 prompt. At the 1.000V prompt press the volt/ammeter. The controller should stabi-
. once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key lize within one second. Repeat until the
< to adjust the display to the reading on the volt/ammeter reads 20.000mA. Press . to
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize store the value.
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- Volts
7. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate and 46 (-).
Rexmit 1 prompt. At the 10.000V prompt press
. once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key 6. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate
< to adjust the display to the reading on the Rexmit 2 prompt. At the 1.000V prompt press
volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize . once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme- < to adjust the display to the reading on the
ter reads 10.000V. Press . to store the value. volt/ammeter. The controller should stabilize
within one second. Repeat until the volt/amme-
8. Rewire for operation and verify calibration. ter reads 1.000V. Press . to store the value.
7. Press the Right Key . at the Calibrate
Retransmit 2 Setup and Calibration Rexmit 2 prompt. At the 10.000V prompt press
1. Connect the correct power supply to terminals . once. Use the Up Key > or the Down Key
Calibration Menu Map

Calibrate Input 1
Calibrate Input 2
Calibrate Input 3
Calibrate Output 1A
Calibrate Output 1B
Calibrate Output 2A
Calibrate Output 2B
Calibrate Rexmit 1
Calibrate Rexmit 2
Restore In1 Cal
Restore In2 Cal
Restore In3 Cal

Factory Page Parameter Table Modbus
Register
Calibrate Input x (1 to 3)
Main Page > Factory > Calibration > Calibrate Input x (1 to 3)
0.00mV Thermocouple Yes (1) Input Active: Always.

1603 [1]
Store 0.000mV cali- 1608 [2]
bration for the ther- 1613 [3]
w
mocouple input.
50.00mV Thermocouple Yes (2) Input Active: Always.
1603 [1]
Store 50.000mV cali- 1608 [2]
bration for the ther- 1613 [3]
w
mocouple input.
32°F Type J Yes (3) Input Active: Always.
1603 [1]
Store 32°F type J 1608 [2]
calibration. 1613 [3]
w
Ground Yes (4) Input Active: Always.

1603 [1]
Store calibration for 1608 [2]
ground at gains of 1 1613 [3]
w
and 32.
Lead Yes (5) Input Active: Always.
1603 [1]
Store calibration for 1608 [2]
lead resistance. 1613 [3]
w
15.0 Ohms* Yes (6) Input Active: Always.

1603 [1]
Store 15.00Ω calibra- 1608 [2]
tion for the 100Ω 1613 [3]
w
RTD input.
1603 [1]
Store 240.00Ω cali- 1608 [2]
bration for the 500Ω 1613 [3]
w
or 1kΩ RTD input.
1603 [1]
Store 380.00Ω cali- 1608 [2]
w
RTD input.
1603 [1]
Store 6080.00Ω cali- 1608 [2]
w
or 1kΩ RTD input.
0.000V Yes (8) Input Active: Always.
1603 [1]
Store 0.000V calibra- 1608 [2]
tion for the process 1613 [3]
w
input.
10.000V Yes (9) Input Active: Always.
1603 [1]
Store 10.000V cali- 1608 [2]
bration for the pro- 1613 [3]
w
cess input.
*The tenth character of your model number determines F4_ _-_ _ _ _-_(5 to 8)RG: 240.00 and 6080.00Ω
what prompts appear and what input resistance values to ✔ NOTE:
use for the RTD calibration. For more information about how parameter settings affect
F4_ _-_ _ _ _-_(1 to 4)RG: 15.00 and 380.00Ω the controller’s operation, see Features Chapter.

Factory Page Parameter Table Modbus
Register
Calibrate Input x (1 to 3)
Main Page > Factory > Calibration > Calibrate Input x (1 to 3)
4.000mA Yes (10) Input Active: Always.
1603 [1]
Store 4mA calibra- 1608 [2]
w
input.
20.000mA Yes (11) Input Active: Always.
1603 [1]
Store 20mA calibra- 1608 [2]
w
input.
Calibrate Output x (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B ) and Retransmit x (1 and 2)

Main > Factory > Calibration / Calibrate Output x (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B) and Retransmit x (1 and 2)
4.000mA 0.000mA to 6.000mA 4.000mA Output Active: Always.
1604 [1A]
Store 4mA calibra- (0 to 6000) (4000)
1609 [1B]
tion for the process 1614 [2A]
1619 [2B]
output.
Rexmit
1624 [1]
1629 [2]
w
20.000mA 0.000 to 24.000mA 20.000mA Output Active: Always.

1605 [1A]
Store 20mA calibra- (0 to 24000) (20000)
1610 [1B]
tion for the process 1615 [2A]
1620 [2B]
output.
Rexmit
1625 [1]
1630 [2]
w
1.000V 0.000 to 3.000V 1.000V Output Active: Always.

1606 [1A]
Store 1.000V cali- (0 to 3000) (1000)
1611 [1B]
bration for the pro- 1616 [2A]
1621 [2B]
cess output.
Rexmit
1626 [1]
1631 [2]
w
10.000V 0.000 to 12.000V 10.000V Output Active: Always.

1607 [1A]
Store 10.000V cali- (0 to 12000) (10000)
1612 [1B]
bration for the pro- 1617 [2A]
1622 [2B]
cess output.
Rexmit
1627 [1]
1632 [2]
w
Restore Input x (1 to 3) Calibration

Main > Factory > Calibration / Restore Input x (1 to 3) Calibration
Restore Input x (1 to 3) Modbus:
1601 w
Calibration Input 1 (0)
Restores original Input 2 (1)
factory calibration Input 3 (2)
values.
✔ NOTE:

10
Chapter Ten: Diagnostics
Overview
Diagnostic Menu parameters (on the Factory Page) Select the parameter by pressing the Right Key ..
provide information about the controller unit that The information will appear on the Lower Display.
is useful in troubleshooting. For example, the Mod- Some of the parameters in the Diagnostic Menu
el parameter will identify the 12-digit Series F4 provide information for factory use only.
part number. The Out1A parameter will identify
what type of output has been selected for Output To reset all parameters to their original factory
1A. values, use the Full Defaults parameter under the
Test Menu.
Diagnostic Menu Map Test Menu Map

Model Test Outputs
Mfg Date Display Test
Serial # Full Defaults
Software #
Revision
In1
In2
In3
Out1A
Out1B
Out2A
Out2B
Retrans1
Retrans2
In1 AtoD
In2 AtoD
In3 AtoD
CJC1 AtoD
CJC2 AtoD
CJC1 Temp
CJC2 Temp
Line Freq
✔ NOTE: ✔ NOTE:
To see how all the pages, menus and parameters are For more information about how parameter settings affect
grouped, refer to the inside back cover of this manual. the controller’s operation, see the Features Chapter.
Watlow Series F4S/D Diagnostics ■ 10.1

Diagnostic Menu Parameter Table (Factory Page) Modbus
Register
Diagnostic
Main > Factory > Diagnostic
Model F4xx-xxxx-xxxx F4xx-xxxx- 0r Active: Always.

Identifies the 12- xxxx
digit Series F4 part
number.
Mfg Date xxxx 0198 5r Active: Always.
Identifies the manu-
facture date.
Serial Number 0 to 999999 0 1r Active: Always.

Identifies the indi- 2r
vidual controller.
Software Number 00 to 99 1 3r Active: Always.
Identifies the soft- (0 to 99)
ware ID number.
Software Revision 0.00 to 9.99 2.01 (201) 4r Active: Always.
Identifies the soft- (0 to 990)
ware revision.
In1 Univ. Single (7) 8r Active: Always.
Displays the input 1
type.
In2 Univ. Dual (8) 9r Active: Always.
Displays the input 2 None (0)
type.
In3 Univ. Dual (8) 10 r Active: Always.
Displays the input 3 None (0)
type.
Out1A DC (3) 16 r Active: Always.
Displays the output SSR (2)
1A type. Process (4)
Out1B DC (3) 17 r Active: Always.

1B type. Process (4)
None (0)
Out2A DC (3) 18 r Active: Always.

2A type. Process (4)
None (0)
Out2B DC (3) 19 r Active: Always.

2B type. Process (4)
None (0)
✔ NOTE: Press the Information Key ˆ for more task-related tips.
10.2 ■ Diagnostics Watlow Series F4S/D

Register
Retrans1 Process (4) 20 r Active: Always.

Displays the retrans- None (0)
mit 1 option.
Retrans2 Process (4) 21 r Active: Always.
Displays the retrans- None (0)
mit 2 option.
In1 AtoD HHHH 1504 r Active: Always.
Factory use only.
Factory use only.
Factory use only.
CJC1 AtoD HHHH 1501 r Active: Always.
Factory use only.
CJC2 AtoD HHHH 1532 r Active: Always.
Factory use only.
CJC1 Temp xx.x (xxx) 1500 r Active: Always.
Cold junction com-
pensation for analog
input 1. Reads the
ambient temperature
of the controller.
CJC2 Temp xx.x (xxx) 1531 r Active: Always.
Cold junction com-
pensation for analog
input 2. Reads the
ambient temperature
of the controller.
Line Freq xx (xx) 1515 r Active: Always.

Display the ac line
frequency in hertz.

Watlow Series F4S/D Diagnostics ■ 10.3

Register
Test
Main > Factory > Test
Test Outputs All Off (0) 1514 w Active: Always.
Choose output to Output 1A (1)
test. Output 1B (2)
Output 2A (3) ✔NOTE: Must be in the Calibra-
Output 2B (4) tion or Test Menu at the display
Retransmit 1 (5) for this prompt to work via com-
Retransmit 2 (6) munications.
Alarm 1 (7)
Alarm 2 (8)
Digital Out 1 (9)
Digital Out 2 (10)
Digital Out 3 (11)
Digital Out 4 (12)
Digital Out 5 (13)
Digital Out 6 (14)
Digital Out 7 (15)
Digital Out 8 (16)
All On (17)
Communications (18)
Display Test Yes (1) 1513 w Active: Always.

Checks LED display
segments by turning
them on and off.
Full Defaults Default all values? 1602 w Active: Always.
Causes all parame- Yes (800)
ters and profile val-
ues to revert to
their factory default
settings.

10.4 ■ Diagnostics Watlow Series F4S/D

11
Chapter Eleven: Installation
Dimensions
0.020 in. (0.5 mm) maximum gap between
3.930 in. controller front panel and mouning panel
(99.8 mm)
4.284 in.
(108.8 mm)
3.930 in.
(99.8 mm)
Figure 11.1a — Front View Dimensions and Gasket Gap Dimension.
4.189 in.
(106.4 mm)
3.850 in.
(97.8 mm)
4.264 in.
(108.3 mm)
0.339 in.
(8.6 mm)
Figure 11.1b — Side and Top View and Dimensions.
Watlow Series F4S/D Installation ■ 11.1

Panel Dimensions
3.930 in.
(99.8 mm) 3.62 to 3.65 in.
(92 to 93 mm)
F4
1A
1B
2A Panel Cutout
2B
Main Page___________ Panel

Go to Profiles
1
3.930 in.
Go to Setup Thickness 3.62 to 3.651 in.
Go to Factory
2
(99.8 mm)
(92 to 93 mm)
0.375 in. maximum
(9.5 mm)
0.675 in.
(17.6 mm)
minimum
0.625 in.
(16 mm)
minimum
Figure 11.2a — Multiple Panel Cutout Dimensions.
Installing the Series F4 Controller

Installing and mounting requires access to the back
of the panel.
Tools required: one #2 Phillips screwdriver.
1. Make the panel cutout using the mounting

template dimensions in this chapter.
2. Insert the controller into the panel cutout.
Check that the rubber gasket lies in its slot at
the back of the bezel. Slide the retention collar
over the case, with open holes facing the back of
the case. Figure 11.2b — Gasket Seated on the Bezel.
3. Align the mounting bracket with the screws tips
pointed toward the panel. Squeezing the bowed
sides of the bracket, push it gently but firmly
over the case until the hooks snap into the slots
at the front of the case.
11.2 ■ Installation Watlow Series F4S/D

4. If the installation does not require a NEMA 4X
seal, tighten the four screws with the Phillips
screwdriver just enough to eliminate the
spacing between the rubber gasket and the
mounting panel.
For a NEMA 4X seal, tighten the four screws
until the gap between the bezel and panel
surface is .020 in. maximum. (See figure 11.1b).
Make sure that you cannot move the controller
back and forth in the cutout. If you can, you do
not have a proper seal. Do not over tighten.
Over tightening could damage the the Figure 11.3a — Retention Collar and Mounting Bracket.
mounting bracket.
Removing the Series F4 Controller

The controller can be removed most easily by
disengaging the mounting bracket hooks and
pushing the controller forward through the panel.
Be ready to support it as it slides forward through
the panel.
Tools required: one #2 Phillips screwdriver, one flat-
head screwdriver and some means of supporting
the controller as it slides out the front of the panel.
1. Remove all the wiring connectors from the back

of the controller. Using the Phillips screwdriver,
Figure 11.3b — Tightening the Screws.
unscrew the four screws on the mounting
bracket (two on top, two on bottom) until the
tips are completely retracted into the shafts.
2. Slide the tip of a flat screwdriver between the
case and the center top side of the mounting
bracket. Rotate the screwdriver 90 degrees,
stretching the bracket away from the case so
the hooks on the bracket disengage from the
slots on the case. Hold the bracket and press
the controller forward slightly to prevent the
disengaged hooks from snapping back into the
slots.
3. Repeat this operation to disengage the hooks on
the bottom side of the mounting bracket.
4. Press with one or two fingers on the lower half
of the back of the unit so that the controller
slides forward through the panel. Hold the
bracket steady; do not pull back. Be ready to Figure 11.3c — Disengaging the Mounting Bracket.
support the controller as it comes through the
front panel. Remove the mounting brackets and
retention collar from the back side of the panel.
Watlow Series F4S/D Installation ■ 11.3

Notes
11.4 ■ Installation Watlow Series F4S/D

12
Chapter Twelve: Wiring
Input-to-Output Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.1
Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
Sensor Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
Input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.3
Inputs x (2 and 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.4
Digital Inputs x (1 to 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.6
Outputs x (1A, 1B, 2A and 2B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.7
Retransmit and Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.8
Digital Outputs x (1 to 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.9
Communications Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.10
Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.12
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.13
Wiring the Series F4

Wiring options depend on the model number, which
is printed on the label on the back of the controller.
The model number codes are explained in the
Appendix.
The labels on the sides and back of the controller
contain some basic wiring information.
Input-to-Output Isolation
The Series F4 uses optical and transformer Isolation Blocks
There are no electrical connections between these blocks.
isolation to provide a barrier to prevent ground
loops when using grounded sensors and/or Analog Input 1
peripheral equipment. Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Here is a breakdown of the isolation barriers:
Analog Input 2 and 3
• Analog input 1 and all the digital inputs
and outputs are grouped together.
Control Outputs
• Analog inputs 2 and 3 are grouped together. Retransmit Outputs
• All the control outputs and retransmit

Communications
outputs are grouped together.
• Both alarm outputs are grouped together.
Alarm Outputs
• Communications is isolated from the other
inputs and outputs.
Figure 12.1 — Isolation Blocks.
Watlow Series F4S/D Wiring ■ 12.1

ç Power Wiring
CAUTION: Use only number 14, AWG copper conductor rated for at least 60°C.
If high voltage is applied 100 to 240V‡ (ac/dc), nominal (85 to 264 actual) F4 _ H - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
to a low-voltage unit,
24 to 28V‡ (ac/dc), nominal (21 to 30 actual) F4 _ L - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
irreversible damage will
occur. The Series F4 has a non-operator-replaceable fuse Type T (time-lag)
rated at 2.0 or 5.0A @ 250V.
ç
fuse 1
WARNING:
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
+
2
1
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
L2 - 2
6
7
Provide a labeled switch
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
Earth Ground 3
or circuit breaker
59 60
3
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
connected to the Series
4
F4 power wiring as the
5
means of disconnection
6
for servicing. Failure to
7
do so could result in
8
damage to equipment
9
and/or property, and/or
10
injury or death to
personnel. 11 12 13 14
ç∫
15 16
WARNING:
To avoid damage to
property and equipment, Figure 12.2 — Power wiring.
and/or injury of loss of
life, use National Electric
Code (NEC) standard
wiring practices to install
and operate the Series
F4. Failure to do so could
Sensor Installation Guidelines
result in such damage, Thermocouple inputs: Extension wire for thermocouples must be of
and/or injury or death. the same alloy as the thermocouple to limit errors.
ç If a grounded thermocouple is required for input 2, the signal to input 3

must be isolated to prevent possible ground loops.
CAUTION: RTD input: Each 1Ω of lead wire resistance can cause a +2°F error
when using a two-wire RTD. A three-wire RTD sensor overcomes this
Maintain isolation problem. All three wires must have the same electrical resistance (i.e.,
between analog inputs 2 same gauge, same length, multi-stranded or solid, same metal).
and 3, and between
analog input 1 and digital Process input: Isolation must be maintained between input 2 and
inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a input 3. If both input 2 and input 3 are process signals, a separate
ground loop. A ground power supply and transmitter must be used for each input. These inputs
loop may cause incorrect must be electrically isolated from one another to prevent ground loops.
readings. Failure to
follow this guideline
could result in damage to
equipment and product.
12.2 ■ Wiring Watlow Series F4S/D

Input 1
ç Figure 12.3a — Thermocouple
WARNING: Available on all units
To avoid damage to Impedance: 20MΩ
property and equipment,
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
59 60
2
3
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
+61
59 60
61 62
45 46 47
48 49 50
Code (NEC) standard
31 32
15 16
61 62
-62
result in such damage, Figure 12.3b — RTD (2- or 3-Wire) 100Ω Platinum
and/or injury or death.
Available on all units
2-wire 3-wire
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
ç
59 60
59 60
2
jumper 60 to 62
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
60 S2 60
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
S1 61 S1 61
59 60
61 62
61 62
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
CAUTION:Maintain S3 62 S3 62
isolation between analog
inputs 2 and 3, and
between analog input 1
and digital inputs 1 to 4
Figure 12.3c — 0-5VÎ, 1-5VÎ or 0-10VÎ (dc) Process
to prevent a ground loop. Available on all units.
A ground loop may cause Input impedance: 20kΩ
incorrect readings.
+59
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
59 60
Failure to follow this

3
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
7
guideline could result in

8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
damage to equipment
61 62
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
-62
and product.
Figure 12.3d — 0-20mA or 4-20mA Process

Available on all units.
Input impedance: 100Ω
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
59 60
2
3
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
+60
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
61 62
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
-62
Figure 12.3e — 0 to 50mV

Available on all units
Impedance: 20MΩ
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
59 60
2
3
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
+61
59 60
61 62
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
-62

Inputs x (2 and 3)
ç Figure 12.4a — Thermocouple
WARNING: F4S _ - _ _ _ 6 - _ _ _ _ or F4D _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
To avoid damage to Impedance: 20MΩ
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
Input 2 Input 3
2
51 52
51 52
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
7
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
Code (NEC) standard
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
and operate the Series +55
F4. Failure to do so could -56
result in such damage, +57
and/or injury or death. -58
Figure 12.4b — RTD (2-wire) 100Ω Platinum

ç F4S _ - _ _ _ 6 - _ _ _ _ or F4D _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
CAUTION: Input 2 Input 3
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
2
51 52
51 52
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
52
6
Maintain isolation
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
jumper 52 to 56
between analog inputs 2
59 60
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
and 3, and between 54
jumper 54 to 58
analog input 1 and digital S1 55
inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a S3 56
ground loop. A ground S1 57
loop may cause incorrect S3 58
could result in damage to Figure 12.4c — RTD (3-wire) 100Ω Platinum
F4S _ - _ _ _ 6 - _ _ _ _ or F4D _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
Input 2 Input 3
1
2
51 52
51 52
20
4
21 22 23 24
56
S2 52
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
S2 54
S1 55
S3 56
S1 57
S3 58

Inputs x (2 and 3) (continued)
ç Figure 12.5a — 0 to 5VÎ, 1 to 5VÎ or 0 to 10VÎ (dc) Process
WARNING: F4S _ - _ _ _ 6 - _ _ _ _ or F4D _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
To avoid damage to Input impedance: 20kΩ
Input 2 Input 3
and/or injury of loss of +51
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
2
51 52
51 52
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
Code (NEC) standard +53
59 60
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
F4. Failure to do so could -56
result in such damage,
and/or injury or death. -58
Figure 12.5b — 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA Process

ç F4S _ - _ _ _ 6 - _ _ _ _ or F4D _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
CAUTION: Input impedance: 100Ω
Maintain isolation
Input 2 Input 3
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
12
between analog inputs 2
51 52
51 52
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
+52
7
and 3, and between
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
analog input 1 and digital
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
+54
inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a
ground loop. A ground
loop may cause incorrect -56
follow this guideline -58
Figure 12.5c — 0 to 50mV
F4S _ - _ _ _ 6 - _ _ _ _ or F4D _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
Impedance: 20MΩ
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
Input 2 Input 3
2
51 52
51 52
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
+55
-56
+57
-58

Digital Inputs x (1 to 4)
Figure 12.6 — Digital Inputs x (1 to 4)
ç Voltage input
WARNING: 0 to 2VÎ (dc) Event Input Low State
To avoid damage to 3 to 36VÎ (dc) Event Input High State
and/or injury of loss of Contact closure
life, use National Electric 0 to 2kΩ Event Input Low State
Code (NEC) standard > 23kΩ Event Input High State
and operate the Series Voltage Input Contact Closure
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
2
17 18 19
17 18 19
3
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
(add a 10kΩ
6
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
pull-up resistor
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
45 46 47
48 49 50
and/or injury or death. for each active
31 32
15 16
61 62
20
20
input)
21 22 23 24
21 22 23 24
ç
CAUTION:
25 26
25 26
Maintain isolation
between analog inputs 2 - Digital Input Common -27 Digital Input Common -27
27 28 29 30
27 28 29 30
and 3, and between + Digital Input 1 +28 Digital Input 1 28

analog input 1 and digital Digital 2 +29 Digital 2 29
inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a Digital 3 +30 10kΩ Digital 3 30
ground loop. A ground Digital 4 +31 Digital 4 31
31 32
31 32
loop may cause incorrect

Digital Input Common (27)
Digital Input 1 (28)
Internal Circuitry

Outputs x (1A, 1B, 2A and 2B)
NOTE:
Switching inductive loads Figure 12.7a — Solid-state Relay
(relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical 24VÅ (ac) minimum, 253VÅ (ac) maximum
relay, switched dc or 0.5 amps, off-state impedance 31MΩ
solid-state relay output Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B
options requires use of
an R.C. suppressor. 42 N.O. 39 N.O. 36 N.O. 33 N.O.
36 37 38
33 34 35
39 40 41
42 43 44
43 COM. 40 COM. 37 COM. 34 COM.
Watlow carries the R.C.
suppressor Quencharc key pin key pin key pin key pin
brand name, which is a F4 _ _ - K _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ F4 _ _ - _ K _ _ - _ _ _ _ F4D _ - _ _ K _ - _ _ _ _ F4D _ - _ _ _ K - _ _ _ _
trademark of ITW
Paktron. Watlow Part No.
33 34 35
36 37 38
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
39 40 41
17 18 19
33 34 35
36 37 38
42 43 44
42 43 44
39 40 41
17 18 19
33 34 35
36 37 38
42 43 44
39 40 41
17 18 19
1
42 43 44
1
1
2
2
3
3
20
20
20
20
4
4
21 22 23 24
21 22 23 24
5
21 22 23 24
5
21 22 23 24
5
6
6
0804-0147-0000.
7
7
8
8
25 26
25 26
9
25 26
9
25 26
51 52
51 52
9
51 52
51 52
10
10
10
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
59 60
59 60
59 60
45 46 47
45 46 47
48 49 50
48 49 50
45 46 47
48 49 50
45 46 47
48 49 50
ç
31 32
31 32
15 16
15 16
31 32
61 62
61 62
15 16
61 62
31 32
15 16
61 62
Figure 12.7b — Switched DC, Open Collector
WARNING:
To avoid damage to • Switched dc configuration
property and equipment, COM not used
and/or injury of loss of DC+ = 22 to 28VÎ (dc)
Code (NEC) standard Maximum supply current is 30mA
wiring practices to install • Open collector output
and operate the Series DC+ not used
result in such damage, DC- = 42VÎ (dc) maximum
and/or injury or death. Off: 10mA maximum leakage
On: 0.2V @ 0.5 amps sink
External
Power
Supply
Switched DC Open Collector +
-
+
42VÎ (dc) max Load
-
dc- - dc-
COM. SSR
COM.
dc+ + dc+
Internal Circuitry Internal Circuitry
Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B
42 dc- 39 dc- 36 dc- 33 dc-

36 37 38
33 34 35
39 40 41
42 43 44
43 COM. 40 COM. 37 COM. 34 COM.

44 dc+ 41 dc+ 38 dc+ 35 dc+
F4 _ _ - C _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ F4 _ _ - _ C _ _ - _ _ _ _ F4D _ - _ _ C _ - _ _ _ _ F4D _ - _ _ _ C - _ _ _ _
33 34 35
36 37 38
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
33 34 35
36 37 38
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
39 40 41
17 18 19
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
42 43 44
42 43 44
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
20
20
20
20
4
4
4
21 22 23 24
5
21 22 23 24
5
21 22 23 24
5
21 22 23 24
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
25 26
9
25 26
9
25 26
9
25 26
9
51 52
51 52
51 52
51 52
10
10
10
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
53 54 55 56 57 58
11 12 13 14
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
27 28 29 30
53 54 55 56 57 58
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
59 60
59 60
59 60
45 46 47
48 49 50
45 46 47
48 49 50
45 46 47
48 49 50
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
31 32
15 16
31 32
15 16
31 32
61 62
15 16
61 62
61 62
61 62

Figure 12.8a — 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 5VÎ, 1 to 5VÎ and 0 to
NOTE: 10VÎ (dc) Process
Switching inductive loads
(relay coils, solenoids, Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B
etc.) with the mechanical
relay, switched dc or 42 amps+ 39 amps+ 36 amps+ 33 amps+
36 37 38
33 34 35
39 40 41
42 43 44
solid-state relay output 43 COM.- 40 COM.- 37 COM.- 34 COM.-
options requires use of 44 volts+ 41 volts+ 38 volts+ 35 volts+
an R.C. suppressor.
F4 _ _ - F _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ F4 _ _ - _ F _ _ - _ _ _ _ F4D _ - _ _ F _ - _ _ _ _ F4D _ - _ _ _ F - _ _ _ _
Watlow carries the R.C.
suppressor Quencharc
33 34 35
36 37 38
33 34 35
36 37 38
33 34 35
36 37 38
33 34 35
36 37 38
17 18 19
39 40 41
17 18 19
39 40 41
39 40 41
17 18 19
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
42 43 44
42 43 44
42 43 44
1
1
2
2
3
3
20
20
20
20
4
4
21 22 23 24
21 22 23 24
21 22 23 24
21 22 23 24
5
5
brand name, which is a
6
6
7
7
8
8
25 26
25 26
25 26
9
25 26
9
9
51 52
51 52
51 52
51 52
10
10
10
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
27 28 29 30
27 28 29 30
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
trademark of ITW
59 60
59 60
59 60
59 60
45 46 47
45 46 47
48 49 50
48 49 50
45 46 47
45 46 47
48 49 50
48 49 50
31 32
31 32
15 16
31 32
31 32
15 16
15 16
15 16
61 62
61 62
61 62
61 62
Paktron. Watlow Part No.
0804-0147-0000.
Retransmit and Alarm Output

ç Figure 12.8b — Retransmit Outputs x (1 and 2)
WARNING: mA maximum load impedance: 800Ω
To avoid damage to volts (dc) minimum load impedance: 1kΩ
and/or injury of loss of Output 1 Output 2
volts 48 volts 45
Code (NEC) standard
48 49 50
45 46 47
COM. 49 COM. 46
amps 50 amps 47
F4. Failure to do so could F4 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - 1 _ _ _ F4 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - 2 _ _ _
result in such damage, or F4 _ _ - _ _ _ _ - 2 _ _ _

33 34 35
36 37 38
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
42 43 44
1
1
2
2
3
3
20
20
4
4
21 22 23 24
21 22 23 24
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
25 26
25 26
9
9
51 52
51 52
10
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
59 60
59 60
45 46 47
45 46 47
48 49 50
48 49 50
31 32
31 32
15 16
15 16
61 62
61 62
Figure 12.8c — Alarm Outputs x (1 and 2)

Alarm Output 1 Alarm Output 2
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
2
1
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
7
2
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
3
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
N.O. 4
4
COM. 5
5
N.C. 6
6
N.O. 7
7
COM. 8
8
N.C. 9
9
9
10
10
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
15 16
15 16
Electromechanical relay without contact suppression

Form C, 2 amp, off-state impedance: 31MΩ

Digital Outputs x (1 to 8)
ç Figure 12.9a — Digital Outputs x (1 to 8)
WARNING: Digital output supply: +5VÎ (dc) ±5%
To avoid damage to Maximum source current: 80mA (total for all 8 switch dc)
and/or injury of loss of Open collector:
life, use National Electric Off (open): 42VÎ (dc) maximum @ 10µA
Code (NEC) standard On (closed): 0.2VÎ (dc) maximum @ 50mA sink
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
and operate the Series +
2
17 18 19
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
Digital Output 1 -18
6
7
F4. Failure to do so could -
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
Digital 2 -19
59 60
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
Digital 3 -20
20
Digital 4 -21
21 22 23 24
Digital 5 -22
Digital 6 -23
Digital 7 -24
Digital 8 -25 +5
25 26
Digital Output 1
Digital Output Common -26
27 28 29 30
Digital Output 8
Digital Output Ground

31 32
Internal Circuitry
Figure 12.9b — Open Collector Example
External Supply
+ -
18
Digital Output 1 - +
50mA
max load
26
Digital Ground
Figure 12.9c — Switched DC Example

17 18
+ External
- Load

Communications Wiring
ç Figure 12.10a — EIA/TIA 485 and EIA/TIA 232 Communications
EIA/TIA 485 EIA/TIA 232
WARNING:
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
2
1
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
7
2
25 26
9
51 52
10
To avoid damage to
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
59 60
3
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
4
5
5
6
7
8
8
Code (NEC) standard
9
10
5V+ termi-
10
nation bias 11
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
T+/R+ 12
F4. Failure to do so could T-/R- 13
result in such damage, Transmit 14
Receive 15
and/or injury or death. 15 16
15 16
COM. 16 COM. 16
Figure 12.10b — Termination for EIA-232 to EIA-485 Converter
33 34 35
36 37 38
39 40 41
17 18 19
42 43 44
1
1
2
3
20
4
21 22 23 24
5
6
2
7
8
25 26
9
51 52
10
53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
3
59 60
45 46 47
48 49 50
31 32
15 16
61 62
45
6
Converter box
termination
7
with pull-up
8
and pull-down
9
resistors.
10
+5V
11 12 13 14
B 1KΩ T+/R+
A 120Ω T-/R-
GND 1KΩ
15 16
Com
If the system does not work properly, it may need termination resistors at each
end of the network. A typical installation would require a 120-ohm resistor
across the transmit/receive terminals (12 and 13) of the last controller in the
network and the converter box or serial card. Pull-up and pull-down 1k resistors
may be needed on the first unit to maintain the correct voltage during the idle
state.
Figure 12.10c — EIA/TIA-232 Connections

14 16 15 14 16 15
¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ ¥1 ¥2 ¥3 ¥4 ¥5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 6 7 8 9
¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ ¥¥¥¥
Wire F4 DB 9 DB25
Color 232 Connector Connector
White TX Pin 14 RX Pin 2 RX Pin 3
Red RX Pin 15 TX Pin 3 TX Pin 2
Black GND Pin 16 Gnd Pin 5 GND Pin 7
Green GND Pin 24 N/U Pin 9 N/U Pin 22
Shield N/C Gnd Pin 5 Gnd Pin 7

Communications Wiring (continued)
ç Figure 12.11a — EIA/TIA 232 to EIA/TIA 485 Conversion
WARNING:
To avoid damage to
and/or injury of loss of 485SD9TB
Code (NEC) standard TD (A) T-/R- 13
TD (B) T+/R+
wiring practices to install COM.
12
16
and operate the Series DB9 Connector (9 pin)
+12VÎ(dc) + EIA-485
F4. Failure to do so could GND – Power Supply
120V~ (ac)
result in such damage, AD-1210

B&B Converter (B&B Electronics Manufacturing Company, (815) 433-5100,
NOTE: www.bb-elec.com)
The CMC converter
requires an external 120V (ac)
power supply when used
with a laptop computer. 9V (dc) (see note)
G
9V
ADA485L
COM.
EIA-232
EIA-485
G 16
T+/R+
DI/O DI/O
B 12
A T-/R-
13
B
A
DB25 Connector (25 pin)
CMC Converter (CMC Connecticut Micro-Computer, Inc., 800-426-2872,

www.2cmc.com)
Figure 12.11b — GPIB Conversion to EIA/TIA 232 or EIA/TIA 485

Communications with Modbus RTU
ICS Model 4899 EIA-232 or

EIA-485
GPIB
ICS GPIB Bus Interface (ICS Electronics, (925) 416-1000, www.icselect.com)

Wiring Example
ç L1
L2
high-
temperature
WARNING: light
fuse high-limit
To avoid damage to coil mechanical
contactor
and/or injury of loss of 44 (dc+) 16 14 15 8
Series F4
life, use National Electric F4 _ H - CA _ _ - O1RG 42 (dc-)
(-)
1 2 1
1
13 14 15
8
rear view 6
Code (NEC) standard 1
DIN-A-MITE
DA10-24C0-0000
2 9
9
17
33 34 35
36 37 38
17 18 19
39 40 41
(+)
42 43 44
3
1
2 5 optional 3 10
2
3 4 normally open
3
4 11
20
4 momentary switch 16 17 18
and operate the Series Heater
21 22 23 24
5
5 12
6
6 (-)
7
6
8
7 (+) 19 20 21
25 26
9
51 52
7
10

53 54 55 56 57 58
27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14
97A1-DDAA-00RR
59 60
and/or injury or death. Limit Controller
31 32
15 16
61 62
61 (+) process sensor limit sensor
ç
62 (-)
WARNING: L2
Install high- or low-

temperature-limit control 1 1 2
1 3 2
protection in systems
4 (+) Series F4
where an over- 2 61 F4_H - CA_ _ - 01RG
temperature fault 3 5 (-) 62 Temperature Controller
condition could present a
fire hazard or other 44 42
hazard. Failure to install 4
6 (+) 7 (-)
1 CR-1
temperature limit control 5 6
5
8 9 1 2 2
protection where a 1
DIN-A-MITE
potential hazard exists DA10-24C0-0000
3 4
equipment, property and 6
Heater
injury to personnel. 10 11
7 9 8
1 12 2
8 13 1 Series 97
9 14 97A1-DDAA-00RR
3
Limit Controller
10
(+) 15 7
11 (-) 16 6 15
12 1CR
14 17 2
13
1 18
17
14
1 19 18
15 R
20 2
high-temperature light
Figure 12.12 — System Wiring Example.

A
Appendix
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.2
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.5
Specifications (Single and Dual Channel) . . . . . . . A.6
Ordering Information (Single and Dual) . . . . . . . . A.7
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.13
Software Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.16
Watlow Series F4S/D Appendix ■ A.1

Glossary cold junction.
control mode — The type of action that a con-
ac (Å
Å) — See alternating current. troller uses. For example, on/off, time proportion-
ing, PID, automatic or manual, and combinations of
ac/dc (ı
ı) — Both direct and alternating current. these.
alternating current — An electric current that cycle time — The time required for a controller to
reverses at regular intervals, and alternates posi- complete one on-off-on cycle. It is usually expressed
tive and negative values. in seconds.
American Wire Gauge (AWG) — A standard of deadband — The range through which a variation
the dimensional characteristics of wire used to con- of the input produces no noticeable change in the
duct electrical current or signals. AWG is identical output. In the dead band, specific conditions can be
to the Brown and Sharpe (B & S) wire gauge. placed on control output actions. Operators select
auto-tune — A feature that automatically sets the deadband value.
temperature control PID values to match a particu- default parameters — The programmed instruc-
lar thermal system. tions that are permanently stored in the micropro-
battery — BR1225, retains volatile memory. Seven- cessor software.
year shelf life, indefinite life with power applied to unit. derivative — The rate of change in a process vari-
baud rate — The rate of information transfer in able. Also known as rate. See PID.
serial communications, measured in bits per second. derivative control (D) — The last term in the
burst fire — A power control method that repeat- PID control algorithm. Action that anticipates the
edly turns on and off full ac cycles. Also called zero- rate of change of the process, and compensates to
cross fire, it switches close to the zero-voltage point minimize overshoot and undershoot. Derivative
of the ac sine wave. Variable-time-base burst fire control is an instantaneous change of the control
selectively holds or transits ac cycles to achieve the output in the same direction as the proportional er-
desired power level. See zero cross. ror. This is caused by a change in the process vari-
able (PV) that decreases over the time of the
calibration accuracy — Closeness between the derivative (TD). The TD is in units of seconds.
value indicated by a measuring instrument and a
physical constant or known standard. Deutsche Industrial Norm (DIN) — A set of
technical, scientific and dimensional standards de-
calibration offset — An adjustment to eliminate veloped in Germany. Many DIN standards have
the difference between the indicated value and the worldwide recognition.
actual process value.
droop — In proportional controllers, the difference
cascade — Control algorithm in which the output between set point and actual value after the system
of one control loop provides the set point for anoth- stabilizes.
er loop. The second loop, in turn, determines the
control action. duty cycle — The percentage of a cycle time in
which the output is on.
CE — A manufacturer’s mark that demonstrates
compliance with European Union (EU) laws gov- EIA — See Electronics Industries of America.
erning products sold in Europe. EIA/TIA -232, -422, -423 and -485 — Data com-
chatter — The rapid on-off cycling of an electrome- munications standards set by the Electronic Indus-
chanical relay or mercury displacement relay due tries of America and Telecommunications Industry
to insufficient controller bandwidth. It is commonly Association. Formerly referred to as RS- (Recog-
caused by excessive gain, little hysteresis and short nized Standard).
cycle time. Electronics Industries of America (EIA) — An
CJC — See cold junction compensation. association in the US that establishes standards for
electronics and data communications.
closed loop — A control system that uses a sensor
to measure a process variable and makes decisions external transmitter power supply — A dc volt-
based on that feedback. age source that powers external devices.
cold junction — See junction, cold. filter, digital — A means to slow the response of a
system when inputs change unrealistically or too
cold junction compensation — Electronic means fast. Equivalent to a standard resistor-capacitor
to compensate for the effective temperature at the (RC) filter.
A.2 ■ Appendix Watlow Series F4S/D

form A — A single-pole, single-throw relay that us- limit or limit controller — A highly reliable, dis-
es only the normally open (NO) and common con- crete safety device (redundant to the primary con-
tacts. These contacts close when the relay coil is en- troller) that monitors and limits the temperature of
ergized. They open when power is removed from the process, or a point in the process. When tem-
the coil. perature exceeds or falls below the limit set point,
the limit controller interrupts power through the
form B — A single-pole, single-throw relay that us- load circuit. A limit controller can protect equip-
es only the normally closed (NC) and common con- ment and people when it is correctly installed with
tacts. These contacts open when the relay coil is en- its own power supply, power lines, switch and sen-
ergized. They close when power is removed from sor.
the coil.
manual mode — A selectable mode that has no
form C — A single-pole, double-throw relay that automatic control aspects. The operator sets output
uses the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC) levels.
and common contacts. The operator can choose to
wire for a form A or form B contact. Modbus™ — A digital communications protocol
owned by AEG Schneider Automation for industrial
Hertz (Hz) — Frequency, measured in cycles per computer networks.
second.
Modbus™ RTU — Remote Terminal Unit, an indi-
hysteresis — A change in the process variable re- vidual Modbus™-capable device on a network.
quired to re-energize the control or alarm output.
Sometimes called switching differential. NEMA 4X — A NEMA (National Electrical Manu-
facturer’s Association) specification for determining
integral — Control action that automatically elim- resistance to moisture infiltration. This rating cer-
inates offset, or droop, between set point and actual tifies the controller as washable and corrosion re-
process temperature. sistant.
integral control (I) — A form of temperature con- on/off controller — A temperature controller that
trol. The I of PID. See integral. operates in either full on or full off modes.
isolation — Electrical separation of sensor from open loop — A control system with no sensory
high voltage circuitry. Allows use of grounded or feedback.
ungrounded sensing element.
output — Control signal action in response to the
JIS — See Joint Industrial Standards. difference between set point and process variable.
Joint Industrial Standards (JIS) — A Japanese overshoot — The amount by which a process vari-
agency that establishes and maintains standards able exceeds the set point before it stabilizes.
for equipment and components. Also known as
JISC (Japanese Industrial Standards Committee), page — A fixed length block of data that can be
its function is similar to Germany’s Deutsche In- stored as a complete unit in the computer memory.
dustrial Norm (DIN).
P control — Proportioning control.
junction, cold — Connection point between ther-
mocouple metals and the electronic instrument. See PD control — Proportioning control with deriva-
junction, reference. tive (rate) action.
junction, reference — The junction in a thermo- PDR control — Proportional derivative control
couple circuit held at a stable, known temperature with manual reset, used in fast responding systems
(cold junction). Standard reference temperature is where the reset causes instabilities. With PDR con-
32°F (0°C). trol, an operator can enter a manual reset value
that eliminates droop in the system.
LCD — See liquid crystal display.
PI control — Proportioning control with integral
LED — See light emitting diode. (auto-reset) action.
light emitting diode (LED) — A solid state elec- PID — Proportional, integral, derivative. A control
tronic device that glows when electric current pass- mode with three functions: proportional action
es through it. dampens the system response, integral corrects for
droop, and derivative prevents overshoot and un-
liquid crystal display (LCD) — A type of digital dershoot.
display made of a material that changes reflectance
or transmittance when an electrical field is applied process variable — The parameter that is con-
to it. trolled or measured. Typical examples are tempera-
ture, relative humidity, pressure, flow, fluid level,

events, etc. The high process variable is the highest teristic to measure temperature. There are two ba-
value of the process range, expressed in engineer- sic types of RTDs: the wire RTD, which is usually
ing units. The low process variable is the lowest made of platinum, and the thermistor, which is
value of the process range. made of a semiconductor material. The wire RTD is
a positive temperature coefficient sensor only, while
proportional — Output effort proportional to the the thermistor can have either a negative or posi-
error from set point. For example, if the proportion- tive temperature coefficient.
al band is 20° and the process is 10° below set
point, the heat proportioned effort is 50 percent. RFI — See radio frequency interference.
The lower the PB value, the higher the gain.
RTD — See resistance temperature detector.
proportional band (PB) — A range in which the
proportioning function of the control is active. Ex- serial communications — A method of transmit-
pressed in units, degrees or percent of span. See ting information between devices by sending all
PID. bits serially over a single communication channel.
proportional control — A control using only the set point — The desired value programmed into a
P (proportional) value of PID control. controller. For example, the temperature at which a
system is to be maintained.
radio frequency interference (RFI) — Electro-
magnetic waves between the frequencies of 10 KHz SI (Systeme Internationale) — The system of
and 300 GHz that can affect susceptible systems by standard metric units.
conduction through sensor or power input lines, switching differential — See hysteresis.
and by radiation through space.
thermal system — A regulated environment that
ramp — A programmed increase in the tempera- consists of a heat source, heat transfer medium or
ture of a set point system. load, sensing device and a control instrument.
range — The area between two limits in which a thermocouple (t/c) — A temperature sensing de-
quantity or value is measured. It is usually device made by joining two dissimilar metals. This
scribed in terms of lower and upper limits. junction produces an electrical voltage in propor-
rate — Anticipatory action that is based on the tion to the difference in temperature between the
rate of temperature change, and compensates to hot junction (sensing junction) and the lead wire
minimize overshoot and undershoot. See derivative. connection to the instrument (cold junction).
rate band — A range in which the rate function of thermocouple break protection — The ability of
a controller is active. Expressed in multiples of the a control to detect a break in the thermocouple cir-
proportional band. See PID. cuit and take a predetermined action.
reference junction — see junction, reference. time proportioning control — A method of con-
trolling power by varying the on/off duty cycle of an
reset — Control action that automatically elimi- output. This variance is proportional to the differ-
nates offset, or droop, between set point and actual ence between the set point and the actual process
process temperature. Also see integral. temperature.
automatic reset — The integral function of a PI transmitter — A device that transmits tempera-
or PID temperature controller that adjusts the pro- ture data from either a thermocouple or a resis-
cess temperature to the set point after the system tance temperature detector (RTD) by way of a two-
stabilizes. The inverse of integral. wire loop. The loop has an external power supply.
The transmitter acts as a variable resistor with re-
automatic power reset — A feature in latching spect to its input signal. Transmitters are desirable
limit controls that does not recognize power outage when long lead or extension wires produce unac-
as a limit condition. When power is restored, the ceptable signal degradation.
output is re-energized automatically, as long as the
temperature is within limits. WatView — A Windows-based software application
for communicating with and configuring Watlow
manual reset — 1) A feature on a limit control that controllers.
requires human intervention to return the limit to nor-
mal operation after a limit condition has occurred. 2) zero cross — Action that provides output switch-
The adjustment of a proportional control to raise the ing only at or near the zero-voltage crossing points
proportional band to compensate for droop. of the ac sine wave. See burst fire.
resistance temperature detector (RTD) — A zero switching — See zero cross.
sensor that uses the resistance temperature charac-

Declaration of Conformity
Series F4 Erklärt, dass das folgende Produkt: Deutsch
Bezeichnung: Serie F4
WATLOW Winona, Inc. Modell-Nummern: F4(S, D oder P)(H or L) – (C, E, F oder K)(A, C, E,
F oder K)(A, C, F or K)(A, C, F, K, 0 oder 6) – (0, 1
1241 Bundy Boulevard oder 2) – (Beliebige drei Ziffern oder Buchstaben)
Winona, Minnesota 55987 USA Klassifikation: Temperaturregler, Installationskategorie II, Ver-
schmutzungsgrad 2
Nennspannung: 100 bis 240 V~ (ac) oder 24 bis 28 V ‡ (ac oder dc)
Nennfrequenz: 50 oder 60 Hz
Declares that the following product: English
Nennstromverbrauch: Max. 39 VA
Designation: Series F4
Model Number(s): F4(S, D or P)(H or L) – (C, E, F or K)(A, C, E, F or
K)(A, C, F or K)(A, C, F, K, 0 or 6) – (0, 1 or 2) – Erfüllt die wichtigsten Normen der folgenden Anweisung(en) der Europäischen
(Any three letters or numbers) Union unter Verwendung des wichtigsten Abschnitts bzw. der wichtigsten Abschnitte
Classification: Temperature control, Installation Category II, Pollu- die unten zur Befolgung aufgezeigt werden.
tion degree 2
Rated Voltage: 100 to 240 VÅ (ac) or 24 to 28 V‡ (ac or dc) 89/336/EEC Elektromagnetische Kompatibilitätsrichtlinie
Rated Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz EN 61326:1997 mit A1:1998 – Elektrisches Gerät für Messung, Kontrolle und
Laborgebrauch – EMV-Anforderungen (Störfestigkeit Industriebereich, Klasse
Rated Power Consumption: 39 VA maximum
A Emissionen)
EN 61000-4-2:1996 mit A1, 1998 – Störfestigkeit gegen elektronische Entladung
Meets the essential requirements of the following European Union Directives by using EN 61000-4-3:1997 – Störfestigkeit gegen Strahlungsfelder
the relevant standards show below to indicate compliance. EN 61000-4-4:1995 – Störfestigkeit gegen schnelle Stöße/Burst
EN 61000-4-5:1995 mit A1, 1996 – Störfestigkeit gegen Überspannung
89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EN 61000-4-6:1996 – Geleitete Störfestigkeit
EN 61326:1997 With A1:1998 – Electrical equipment for measurement, control and EN 61000-4-11:1994 Störfestigkeit gegen Spannungsabfall, kurze
laboratory use – EMC requirements (Industrial Immunity, Class A Emissions). Unterbrechungen und Spannungsschwankungen
EN 61000-3-2:1995 mit A1-3:1999 – Harmonische Stromemissionen
EN 61000-4-2:1996 With A1, 1998 – Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
EN 61000-3-3:1995 mit A1:1998 – Spannungsfluktationen und Flimmern
EN 61000-4-3:1997 – Radiated Field Immunity
EN 61000-3-3: 1995 Grenzen der Spannungsschwankungen und Flimmern
EN 61000-4-4:1995 – Electrical Fast-Transient / Burst Immunity
EN 61000-4-5:1995 With A1, 1996 – Surge Immunity
73/23/EEC Niederspannungsrichtlinie
EN 61000-4-6:1996 – Conducted Immunity
EN 61010-1:1993 mit A1:1995 Sicherheitsanforderungen für elektrische
EN 61000-4-11:1994 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Immunity
EN 61000-3-2:1995 With A1-3:1999 – Harmonic Current Emissions Geräte für Messungen, Kontrolle und Laborgebrauch. Teil 1: Allgemeine
EN 61000-3-3:1995 With A1:1998 – Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker Anforderungen
73/23/EEC Low-Voltage Directive

EN 61010-1:1993 With A1:1995 Safety Requirements of electrical equipment
Declara que el producto siguiente: Español
for measurement, control and laboratory use. Part 1: General requirements
Designación: Serie F4
Números de modelo: F4(S, D o P)(H or L) – (C, E, F o K)(A, C, E, F o
K)(A, C, F o K)(A, C, F, K, 0 o 6) – (0, 1 o 2) –
déclare que le produit suivant : Français (Cualesquiera tres letras o números)
Désignation : Séries F4 Clasificación: Control de temperatura, Categoría de instalación II,
Numéros de modèles : F4(S, D ou P)(H ou L) – (C, E, F ou K)(A, C, E, F Grado de contaminación 2
ou K)(A, C, F ou K)(A, C, F, K, 0 ou 6) – (0, 1 ou 2) Tensión nominal: 100 a 240 V~ (CA) o 24 a 28 V ‡(CA o CD)
– (N’importe quelle combinaison de trois lettres ou Frecuencia nominal: 50 o 60 Hz
chiffres) Consumo nominal de energía: 39 VA máximo
Classification : Régulation de température, Catégorie d’installation
II, Degré de pollution 2 Cumple con los requisitos esenciales de las siguientes Directrices de la Unión Eu-
Tension nominale : 100 à 240 V~ (c.a) ou 24 à 28 V ‡ (c.a ou c.c) ropea mediante el uso de las normas aplicables que se muestran a continuación
Fréquence nominale : 50 ou 60 Hz para indicar su conformidad.
Consommation d’alimentation nominale : 39 VA maximum
89/336/EEC Directriz de compatibilidad electromagnética
Répond aux normes essentielles des directives suivantes de l'Union européenne EN 61326:1997 CON A1:1998.– Equipo eléctrico para medición, control y uso
en utilisant les standards normalisés ci-dessous qui expliquent les normes en laboratorio – Requisitos EMC (Inmunidad industrial, Emisiones Clase A).
auxquelles répondre : EN 61000-4-2:1996 con A1, 1988 – Inmunidad a descarga electrostática
EN 61000-4-3:1997 – Inmunidad a campo radiado
Directive 89/336/CEE sur la compatibilité électromagnétique EN 61000-4-4:1995 – Inmunidad a incremento repentino/rápidas fluctuaciones
EN 61326:1997 avec A1 :1998 – Matériel électrique destiné à l’étalonnage, au eléctricas transitorias
contrôle et à l’utilisation en laboratoire – Exigences CEM (Immunité indus- EN 61000-4-5:1995 con A1, 1996 – Inmunidad a picos de voltaje o corriente
trielle, Émissions de catégorie A). EN 61000-4-6:1996 – Inmunidad por conducción
EN 61000-4-2:1996 Avec A1, 1998 – Immunité aux décharges électrostatiques EN 61000-4-11:1994 Inmunidad a caídas de voltaje, variaciones y pequeñas
EN 61000-4-3:1997 – Immunité aux champs de radiation interrupciones de voltaje
EN 61000-4-4:1995 – Immunité contre les surtensions électriques rapides/ Rafale EN 61000-3-2:1995 con A1-3:1999 – Emisiones de corriente armónica
EN 61000-4-5:1995 avec A1, 1996 – Immunité contre les surtensions EN 61000-3-3:1995 con A1:1998 – Fluctuaciones de voltaje y centelleo.
EN 61000-4-6:1996 – Immunité conduite
EN 61000-4-11:1994 Immunité contre les écarts de tension, interruptions courtes
et variations de tension 73/23/EEC Directriz de bajo voltaje
EN 61000-3-2:1995 avec A1-3 :1999 – Emissions de courant harmoniques EN 61010-1:1993 con A1:1995 Requisitos de seguridad de equipo eléctric
EN 61000-3-3:1995 avec A1 :1998 – Fluctuations et vacillements de tension para medición, control y uso en laboratorio. Parte 1: Requisitos generales
Directive 73/23/CEE sur les basses tensions Jim Boigenzahn Winona, Minnesota, USA
EN 61010-1:1993 avec A1 :1995 Normes de sécurité du matériel électrique
Name of Authorized Representative Place of Issue
pour la mesure, le contrôle et l’utilisation en laboratoire. 1ère partie : Condi-
tions générales
General Manager September 2001
Title of Authorized Representative Date of Issue
(2250)
Signature of Authorized Representative

Specifications
Universal Analog Inputs 1 (2 and 3 optional) Power
• Update rates, In1: 20Hz; In2 and In3: 10Hz • 100 to 240VÅ (ac), -15%, +10%; 50/60Hz, ±5%
Thermocouple • 24 to 28Vı (ac/dc), -15%, +10% (order option)
• Type J, K, T, N, C (W5), E, PTII, D (W3), B, R, S • 39VA maximum power consumption
RTD
• 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100 Ω • Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile
• JIS or DIN curves, 1.0 or 0.1 indication memory (seven years for battery-backed RAM).
Process Sensor input isolation from input to input to output to
• Input resolution ≈ 50,000 bits at full scale communication circuitry is 500VÅ (ac).
• Range selectable: 0 to 10VÎ (dc), 0 to 5VÎ (dc), 1 to Operating Environment
5VÎ (dc), 0 to 50mV, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA • 32 to 130°F (0 to 55°C)
• Voltage input impedance 20 kΩ • 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing
• Current input impedance 100 Ω • Storage temperature: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)
Digital Inputs (4) Accuracy
• Update rate: 10 Hz • Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: ±0.1% of
• Contact or dc voltage (36 VÎ (dc) maximum) span ±1°C @ 77°F ±5°F (25°C ±3°C) ambient, and
• 10 kΩ input impedance rated line voltage ±10% with the following exceptions:
Control Outputs (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B) Type T, 0.12% of span for -200°C to -50°C
• Update rate: 20 Hz Types R and S, 0.15% of span for 0°C to 100°C
Open Collector/Switched DC Type B, 0.24% of span for 870°C to 1700°C
• Internal load switching (nominal): • Accuracy span: Less than or equal to operating ranges,
Switched dc, 22 to 28VÎ (dc), limited @ 30 mA 1000°F (540°C) minimum
• External load switching (maximum): • Temperature stability: ±0.1°F/°F (±0.1°C/°C) rise in
Open collector 42VÎ (dc) @ 0.5 A ambient for thermocouples
Solid-state Relay • ±0.05°F/°F (±0.05°C/°C) rise in ambient for RTD
• Zero switched, optically coupled, 0.5 A @ sensors
24VÅ (ac) minimum, 253VÅ (ac) maximum Displays
Process Outputs (Optional Retransmit) ° Update rate: 2 Hz
• Update rate: 1 Hz • Process: 5, seven-segment LED red
• User-selectable 0 to 10VÎ (dc), 0 to 5VÎ (dc), • Control interface display: high-definition LCD green
1 to 5VÎ (dc) @1 kΩ min., 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA @ Sensor Operating Ranges:
800 Ω max. Type J: 32 to 1500°F or 0 to 815°C
• Resolution: Type K: -328 to 2500°F or -200 to 1370°C
dc ranges: 2.5mV nominal Type T: -328 to 750°F or -200 to 400°C
mA ranges: 5 µA nominal Type N: 32 to 2372°F or 0 to 1300°C
• Calibration accuracy: Type E: -328 to 1470°F or -200 to 800°C
dc ranges: ±15 mV Type C: 32 to 4200°F or 0 to 2315°C
mA ranges: ±30 µA Type D: 32 to 4352°F or 0 to 2400°C
• Temperature stability 100ppm/°C Type PTII: 32 to 2543°F or 0 to 1395°C
Alarm Outputs Type R: 32 to 3200°F or 0 to 1760°C
• Output update rate1 Hz Type S: 32 to 3200°F or 0 to 1760°C
• Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2 A @ Type B: 32 to 3300°F or 0 to 1816°C
30VÎ (dc) or 240VÅ (ac) maximum RTD (DIN):-328 to 1472°F or -200 to 800°C
Digital Outputs (8) RTD (JIS): -328 to 1166°F or -200 to 800°C
• Update rate: 10 Hz Process: 19999 to 30000 units
• Open collector output Sensor Accuracy Ranges:
• Off: 42VÎ (dc) max @ 10 µA Input ranges
• On: 0.2VÎ (dc) max @ 50 mA sink Type J: 32 to 1382°F or 0 to 750°C
• Internal supply: 5VÎ (dc), @ 80 mA Type K: -328 to 2282°F or -200 to 1250°C
Communications Type T: -328 to 662°F or -200 to 350°C
EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial communications Type N: 32 to 2282°F or 0 to 1250°C
with Modbus™ RTU protocol Type E: -328 to 1470°F or -200 to 800°C
Safety and Agency Approvals Type C(W5) 32 to 4200°F or 0 to 2315°C
• UL®/C-UL 916-listed, File # E185611 Type D(W3) 32 to 4352°F or 0 to 2400°C
Process Control Equipment Type PTII: 32 to 2540°F or 0 to 1393°C
• CE EMC to EN 61326 Type R: 32 to 2642°F or 0 to 1450°C
• CE Safety to EN 61010 Type S: 32 to 2642°F or 0 to 1450°C
• IP65 and NEMA 4X Type B: 1598 to 3092°F or 870 to 1700°C
Terminals RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472°F or -200 to 800°C
• Touch-safe, removable terminal blocks, accepts 12- to RTD (JIS): -328 to 1166°F or -200 to 630°C
22-gauge wire Process: -19999 to 30000 units

1 Ordering Information 2 Ordering Information
Single Dual
Channel Channel
1/4 DIN Single-Channel Ramping Controller 1/4 DIN Dual-Channel Ramping Controller
Series F4 F4 S - A - Series F4 F4 D - -
1
⁄4 DIN, Single-Channel 1
⁄4 DIN, Dual-Channel
Ramping Controller Ramping Controller
Single-Channel Dual-Channel
Ramping Controller Ramping Controller
1 universal analog input, 4 digital 3 universal analog inputs, 4 digital
inputs, 8 digital outputs, 2 alarms, inputs, 8 digital outputs, 2 alarms,
EIA-232/485 communications EIA-232/485 comms
Power Supply Power Supply
H = 100 to 240Vı (ac/dc) H = 100 to 240Vı (ac/dc)
L = 24 to 28Vı (ac/dc) L = 24 to 28Vı (ac/dc)
Output 1A Output 1A
C = Open collector/switched dc C = Open collector/switched dc
F = Process, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10VÎ (dc), F = Process, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10VÎ (dc),
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
K = Solid-state Form A 0.5-amp relay K = Solid-state Form A 0.5-amp relay
Output 1B Output 1B
A = None A = None
C = Open collector/switched dc C = Open collector/switched dc
F = Process, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10VÎ (dc), F = Process, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10VÎ (dc),
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
K = Solid-state Form A 0.5-amp relay K = Solid-state Form A 0.5-amp relay
Auxiliary Input Module Output 2 A
0 = None C = Open collector/switched dc
6 = Dual universal inputs F = Process, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10VÎ (dc),
Auxiliary Retransmit Module 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
0 = None K = Solid-state Form A 0.5-amp relay
1 = Single retransmit output 0 to 5, 1 to 5, Output 2 B
0 to 10VÎ (dc), 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA A = None
2 = Dual retransmit outputs 0 to 5, 1 to 5, C = Open collector/switched dc
0 to 10VÎ (dc), 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA F = Process, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10VÎ (dc),
Language and RTD Options 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
1 = English with 100 Ω RTD K = Solid-state Form A 0.5-amp relay
2 = German with 100 Ω RTD Auxiliary Retransmit Module
3 = French with 100 Ω RTD 0 = None
4 = Spanish with 100 Ω RTD 1 = Single retransmit output 0 to 5, 1 to 5,
5 = English with 500 and 1 kΩ RTD 0 to 10VÎ (dc), 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
6 = German with 500 and 1 kΩ RTD 2 = Dual retransmit outputs 0 to 5, 1 to 5,
7 = French with 500 and 1 kΩ RTD 0 to 10VÎ (dc), 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
8 = Spanish with 500 and 1 kΩ RTD Language and RTD Options
Display and Custom Options 1 = English with 100 Ω RTD
RG = Standard Display (Red/Green display only) 2 = German with 100 Ω RTD
XX = Custom options: software, setting parameters, overlay 3 = French with 100 Ω RTD
4 = Spanish with 100 Ω RTD
5 = English with 500 and 1 kΩ RTD
6 = German with 500 and 1 kΩ RTD
7 = French with 500 and 1 kΩ RTD
8 = Spanish with 500 and 1 kΩ RTD
Display and Custom Options
RG = Standard Display, (Red/Green display only)
XX = Custom options: software, setting parameters, overlay

Index Decimal 5.9, 7.2
Deviation Cascade High Range
Calibration Offset 5.10, 6.2
Cascade 6.11, 7.3
5.10 Analog Input 3 5.10
°F or °C 5.7
Deviation Cascade Low Range 5.10 Autotuning 3.6
A Error Latch 5.10 cascade system 3.6, 6.11
A to D 10.3 Filter Time 5.10 cascade system, tuning 3.6
accuracy A.6 Open Loop 5.7 control, selecting 3.6
Action, End 4.15 Process Cascade High Range 5.10 inner loop 3.6, 6.11
active output indicator lights 2.2 Process Cascade Low Range 5.10 internal set point 6.11
add step 4.6 Sensor 5.8 long lag times 6.11
Address 5.14, 7.16 Type 5.8 outer loop 3.6, 6.11
agency approvals A.6 Units 5.9 overshoot 3.6, 6.11
Alarm 1 High Deviation 3.14 Wait for 4.14 parameters 3.13–3.14
Alarm 1 High SP 3.14 Analog Input x Menu 5.8 PID 6.11
Alarm 1 Low Deviation 3.14 Analog Range, Retransmit Output setup 3.6
Alarm 1 Low SP 3.14 5.12 Cascade High Range
Alarm 2 High Deviation 3.14 Automatic Operation 3.1 Deviation 5.10
Alarm 2 High SP 3.14 automatic tuning 3.5, 3.6 Process 5.10
Alarm 2 Low Deviation 3.14 Autostart Menu 4.2, 4.12 Cascade Inner Loop 3.11
Alarm 2 Low SP 3.14 Date 4.12 Cascade Low Range
alarm band example 5.5 Day 4.12 Deviation 5.10
alarm clearing 3.4 Time 4.12 Process 5.10
Alarm High Set Point 3.4 Autostart Profile Date Or Day 4.12 Cascade Outer Loop 3.11
Alarm Hysteresis 5.12, 6.8 autostart step application 7.19 CE Declaration of Conformity A.5
Alarm Latching 5.12, 6.9 Autotune, selecting set points 3.4 Ch2 Output Disable? 5.9
Alarm Logic 5.12 Autotune PID Cascade Menu 3.11 changing and setting password 8.2
Alarm Low Set Point 3.4 Autotune PID Menu 3.4–3.5, 3.11 Channel 1, PID Set 4.15
alarm messages 3.8 autotuning 3.4–3.5, 6.7 Channel 2, PID Set 4.15
Alarm Messages 5.12 cascade 3.6 Channel x Autotune 3.11
Alarm Name 5.12 lockout 8.3 Channel x Autotune Set Point 5.7
alarm output indicator lights 2.2 operation 3.4, 3.11, 6.7 charts
Alarm Output x Menu 5.12 PID Autotune 3.4, 3.11, 6.7 Custom Main Page 5.3
Alarm Set Point Menu 3.14 Autotuning Channel x 2.8, 3.4, 5.7 Operations Page Record 3.15
alarm set points 3.4, 3.14, 6.8, 8.3 Setup Page Record 5.16
Alarm Sides 5.12, 6.9, 7.2 B User Profile Record 4.7
Alarm Silencing 5.12, 6.9 B&B Converter 12.11 Choose Cycle Time, Control Output x
Alarm Source 5.12 Battery A.2 5.11
alarm status, indicator lights 2.2 Baud Rate 5.14, 7.16 Choose Scaling 5.9
Alarm Type 5.12 Boost Cool, Digital Output Function CJCx A to D, Diagnostics 10.3
alarms 6.10 CJCx Temp, Diagnostics 10.3
deviation 3.4, 6.8 Boost Heat, Digital Output Function clear alarm, key press simulation
features 6.8–6.9 6.10 3.4, 7.3
operation 3.4 Boost Percent Power 5.13, 6.10 clear error, key press simulation 3.4,
process 3.4, 6.8 Boost Time Delay 5.13, 6.10 7.3
self-clearing 6.9 burst fire 6.6 Clear Locks, Set Lockout 8.3
troubleshooting 3.8 heater life 6.6 closed-loop configuration 3.1
Altitude 5.9 noise generation (RFI) 6.6 closed-loop control, see automatic
Alternating Display 5.15 sine wave 6.6 operation
ambient temperature A.6 CMC converter 12.11
Analog Input x
C communications 5.14, 7.1, 7.16
Calibration, overview 9.1 communications indicator light 2.2
A To D, Diagnostics 10.3
inputs 9.2–9.4 Communications Menu 5.14, 7.16
Calibration Offset 5.10
outputs 9.4–9.6 communications wiring

B&B converter 12.11 deviation alarm 3.4 system errors 3.8–3.9
CMC converter 12.11 diagnostics troubleshooting 3.8–3.9
EIA-232 to EIA-485 conversion overview 10.1 event input 4.13, 6.3
12.11 menu map 10.1 see, Digital Input x
EIA/TIA 485 12.10 Digital Inputs x 5.10–5.11, 6.3 event output, ramp rate or ramp time
EIA/TIA 232 12.10 Condition 2.3, 2.8, 5.10, 5.11 or soak steps 4.12
termination for EIA-232 to EIA-485 Function 5.11 see, Digital Output x
converter 12.10 Name 5.10
Complementary Output, Digital Out- number of 1.1 F
put 5, Function 5.13 see, event input Factory Page 2.1, 8.1, 9.1, 10.1
Compressor Control 6.10 specifications A.6 lockout 8.3
Compressor Off % Power 5.14, 6.10 status 2.3, 2.8 parameter table 9.7
Compressor Off Delay 5.14, 6.10 wiring 12.6 Fahrenheit scale 5.1
Compressor On % Power 5.14, 6.10 Digital Outputs x Filter Time 5.10, 6.2
Compressor On Delay 5.14, 6.10 condition 2.3, 2.8 filter time constant 6.2
Condition, Digital Input x 5.11 Function 5.13 Frequently Asked Questions 4.10
conformity A.5 Name 5.13 Full Access 8.1, 8.3
continue profile 3.3 number of 1.1 Full Default 10.1, 10.4
Control Output Function 5.10, 12.7 see, event output Function
Control Output x Menu 3.5, 5.11 specifications A.6 Control Output x 5.11
controller, overview 1.1 wiring 12.9 Digital Input x 5.11
cooling compressor 6.10 dimensions 11.1–11.2 Digital Output x 5.13
creating a profile application 7.18 Display Test 10.4
Current Date 5.7 displays 2.2–2.4 G
Current Process Input, Calibration cursor 2.2 global system parameters 5.4
9.3 front panel 2.2 Guarantee Soak 4.3
Current Time 5.7 Lower Display 2.2 Guarantee Soak Band x 5.7
cursor 2.2 scroll bar 2.2 Guarantee Soak, ramp rate or ramp
Custom Main Page Menu 5.15 Upper Display 2.2 time or soak steps 4.13
Custom Main Page Record 5.3 displays, overview 2.1 guided setup and programming 2.5
Custom Message 1 to 4 7.3 dry bulb 5.8
customizing the Main Page 5.2 dual channel 1.1
Cycle Time 5.11 dwell — see soak, soak step H
cycle time adjustment 3.5 High Power Limit 5.6, 5.11
High Scale 5.13, 6.3
E Hold 3.3, 4.5
D edit PID 3.4, 3.11 hold profile 3.3
Dead Band 3.5, 3.12, 3.13, 6.5 Edit PID Menu 2.5, 3.4–3.5, holdback, see guaranteed soak
Cascade Inner Loop 3.12 3.11–3.12 hours remaining, ramp time or soak
Cascade Outer Loop 3.13 edit profile 4.6 step, current profile status
integral action 6.5 End step 4.3, 4.15 4.13
PID set 3.13, 6.4–6.5 action, end step 4.6 Hysteresis 6.4
PID Set 1 to 5 3.12 Idle Set Point, Channel x 4.16 boost heat & cool 6.10
PID Set 6 to 10 3.13 Enter Cycle Time 5.11 Cascade Inner Loop 3.12
proportional action 6.5 Enter In1 Temp High 5.9 Cascade Outer Loop 3.14
Decimal 5.9 Enter In1 Temp Low 5.9 PID Set 1 to 5 3.12
Declaration of Conformity A.5 enter key 2.6 PID Set 6 to 10 3.13
default Main Page parameters 2.3, environmental testing 1.2–1.3
2.8 Error Latch, Analog Input x 5.10
Delete Profile 4.6 errors
I
“i” key 1.4, 2.4, 2.7
Delete Step 4.6 fatal errors 3.8–3.9
Idle 4.5
Derivative 3.11, 3.12, 3.13 input errors 3.8–3.9
Idle Set Point 4.5, 4.16
derivative rate adjustment 3.5 operation 3.8–3.9
Idle Set Point, Channel x, power out

action 5.7 Line Frequency 10.3 names, how to enter 2.6
indicator lights 2.2 linearization table 5.8 naming
Information Key 1.4, 2.4, 2.7 lockout 8.1–8.3 alarm output 2.6, 5.13
Input 1 Only, Process Display 5.15 locks 8.3 digital input 2.6, 5.10
Input 1 wiring 12.3 Clear Locks 8.3 digital output 2.6, 5.12
Input 2 wiring 12.4–12.5 levels 8.1 profiles 2.6, 4.4
Input 3 wiring 12.4–12.5 Set Lock 8.3 navigation 2.4
input calibration 9.2–9.4 Low Power Limit 5.11 navigation keys 2.4
input errors 3.9 Low Scale 5.12, 6.3 noise filter 6.2
input status 2.8 Lower Display 2.2 non-volatile memory 4.2
input wiring 12.3–12.5 numbers, how to enter 2.6
Input x Error 2.8 M
Input x Failure 5.7 Main Page 2.3, 2.8 O
input-to-output isolation 12.1 Alarm x Condition 2.8 On-Off control 6.4
inputs and outputs 1.1 Autotuning Channel x 2.8 chattering 6.4
calibration 9.2–9.6 Custom Main Page 2.3, 5.2, 5.3 Hysteresis x (A or B) 6.4
dual-channel Series F4 1.1 default Main Page 2.3 Proportional Band x (A or B) 6.4
single-channel Series F4 1.1 error messages on 2.3 Open Loop Channel x, enable 5.7
wiring, overview 12.1–12.2 parameter table 2.8 Open Loop Detect 6.2
insert step 4.6 manual operation, not allowed, 3.1 operations
installation manual tuning 3.5–3.6 overview 3.1
dimensions 11.1 Manufacture Date 10.2 profile control 3.2
installing 11.2 map, software A.16–A.17 sample application 3.7
overview 11.2–11.3 menu and page maps Operations Page
tools required 11.2 all A.16–A.17 map 3.10
Integral Reset Adjustment 3.5 Calibration Menu 9.6 Parameter Record 3.15
Integral x Communications Menu 5.14, 7.16 parameter table 3.11
Cascade Inner Loop 3.11 Diagnostics Menu 10.1 operator’s display, see lower display
Cascade Outer Loop 3.13 Operations Page 3.10 ordering information A.7
PID Set 1 to 5 3.11 Profiles Page 4.11 Output Calibration 9.4–9.6
PID Set 6 to 10 3.12 Set Lockout Menu 8.2 output condition, indicators 2.2
Internal Cascade SP 6.11 Setup Page 5.6 Outputs, Event, number of 1.1
isolation barriers 12.1 Message 1 to 4, Static Message 5.15 outputs x (1A, 1B, 2A and 2B)
Military Standard Test 810D 3.7, type 10.2
J 4.8–4.9 wiring 12.7–12.8
Jump Modbus registers
Count 4.15 alphabetical listing 7.2–7.10 P
Profile 4.15 numerical listing 7.13–7.15 P (Parameter) x, Custom Main Page
Repeats 4.15 profile parameters 7.10–7.12 5.15
Step 4.13, 4.15 Modbus Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) page and menu maps
7.1 all A.16–A.17
K Modbus RTU protocol 7.1 Calibration Menu 9.6
keys Model Number 12.1, A.7 Communications Menu 5.14, 7.16
Information Key 1.4, 2.4, 2.7 Model, Diagnostic 10.2 Diagnostics Menu 10.1
Left and Right Keys 2.4, A.17 multiple PID sets 3.5, 6.6 Operations Page 3.10
Profile Key 2.4, A.17 multiple tuning procedure 3.5 Profiles Page 4.11
Up and Down Keys 2.4, A.17 Set Lockout Menu 8.2
keys, displays and navigation, N Setup Page 5.6
overview 2.1, A.17 Name pages, software 2.1, A.16–A.17
Alarm Output x 5.12 Panel Lock 5.5
L Digital Input x 5.10 parameter record
Latching, Alarm Output x 5.12 Digital Output x 5.13 Custom Main Page 5.3

Operations Page 3.15 terminate a profile 3.3 ramp steps, number of 1.1
Profile 4.7 profile lockout 7.8, 8.1 Ramp Time 4.12–4.13
Setup Page 5.16 profile mode 3.2 ramping mode 3.2
parameter setup order 5.1–5.2 profile number 7.12 ramping profile 4.2
parameter tables profile plan checklist 4.3 range high 6.3
Calibration Menu 9.7–9.8 profile programming range low 6.3
Communications Menu 5.14, 7.16 editing a profile 4.6 Rate 6.5
Diagnostic Menu 10.2–10.3 frequently asked questions 4.10 Cascade Inner Loop 3.12
Main Page 2.8 Modbus flowcharts 7.17–7.26 Cascade Outer Loop 3.13
Operations Page 3.11–3.14 new profile 4.4 PID Set 1 to 5 3.11
Profiles Page 4.12–4.16 overview 4.1 PID Set 6 to 10 3.12
Set Lockout Menu 8.3 procedures 7.17–7.26 read only 8.1
Setup Page 5.7–5.15 Profiles Page parameters real-time clock 1.1
Test Menu 10.4 4.12–4.16 recipe —see file or profile
password lock 8.1 sample profile 4.8–4.9 Records
password, setting or changing 8.2 step types 4.2–4.3, 4.12, 4.16 Custom Main Page 5.3
pattern — see profile User Profile Record 4.7 Operations Page Record 3.15
pause (Hold) profile 4.3 profile Modbus registers 7.10–7.12 Profile Page Record 4.7
Percent Power Output, status 7.2 Profile Status message 3.2 Setup Page Record 5.15
PI control 6.5 profile wait for, analog input x or reference compensator 9.2
droop 6.5 event x 4.13 registers
Integral 6.5 profile, defined 4.2 Modbus 7.2–7.15
overshoot 6.5 Profiles Page 4.4 profile 7.10–7.12
reset 6.5 create profile 4.4 relative humidity (RH) 5.5
PID block, see PID set edit profile 4.6 removing the controller 11.3
PID control 6.5 map 4.11 renaming profiles, see naming,
autotuning 6.8 programming new profile 4.4–4.5 profiles
derivative 6.5 Proportional Band x 6.4 Reset 6.5
PID parameters, adjusting manually adjustment 3.5 Cascade Inner Loop 3.11
3.5 Cascade Inner Loop 3.11 Cascade Outer Loop 3.13
PID sets 6.6 Cascade Outer Loop 3.13 PID Set 1 to 5 3.11
PID Units 5.1, 5.7 PID Set 1 to 5 3.11 PID Set 6 to 10 3.12
PID values, defaults 3.4 PID Set 6 to 10 3.12 resistance temperature detector
Power Out Condition 4.3 proportional control 6.4 (RTD) 5.4
power wiring 12.2 droop 6.4 restore factory calibration values 9.1
Power-Out Action 5.7 proportional plus integral (PI) control Resume Profile 3.3
Power-Out Time 5.7 6.5 retransmit outputs
Process Display 5.15 droop 6.5 calibration 9.5–9.6
process input range limits integral 6.5 diagnostics 10.3
process input, wiring 12.2 overshoot 6.5 wiring 12.8
process or deviation alarms 3.4, 6.8 reset 6.5 Retransmit Source 5.12
Process Output, Calibration 7.7, 9.4 proportional plus integral plus retransmitting 6.3
Output 1 Calibration 7.7, 9.4 derivative (PID) control 6.5 chart recorder 6.3
Output 2 Calibration 7.7, 9.4 derivative 6.5 outputs 1 and 2 6.3
Process, Control Output x 5.11 PV bias, see calibration offset remote set point 6.3
Profile Action Menu 3.3 Rotronics 5.8
profile control 3.2, 5.10 Q RTD 5.4, A.6
profile indicator light 2.2 questions 4.10 input, calibration 9.2
Profile Key 2.4, 3.2, 3.3 inputs, wiring 12.3–12.4
hold a profile 3.3 R
resume a profile 3.3 Ramp Rate 4.2, 4.12–4.13 S
run a profile 3.2 Ramp Set Point Channel x 4.13 safety info ii
start a profile 3.2 sample application, enviroonmental

testing 1.2–1.3, 3.7, 4.8–4.9, sample application 5.4–5.5 U
5.4–5.5 setup guidelines 5.1 U.S. units 5.1, 5.7
Scale High 5.9, 6.3 Setup Page Map 5.6 Units
Scale Low 5.9, 6.3 Show ˚F or ˚C 5.7 Analog Input 5.9
Scale Offset 5.13 silence, alarm 5.12, 6.9 input measurement 5.9
scroll bar 2.2 Silencing, Alarm Output x 5.12 PID 5.7
security and locks, overview 8.1 single channel 1.1 SI, U.S. 5.1, 5.7
full access 8.1 Soak Step 4.3 upper display 2.2
hidden 8.1 Soak Step Time 4.13 use password 8.2
password 8.1 software map A.16–A.17 user ramp chart 4.7
read-only 8.1 Software Number 10.2
security levels 8.1 software, page and menu maps
segment —see step Calibration Menu 9.6
V
Vaisala 5.5, 5.8
self-clearing alarm 6.9 Diagnostics Menu 10.2
values, enter 2.5
self tune —see autotune Operations Page 3.10
Variable Burst, Cycle Time 5.10
sensor installation guidelines 12.2 Profiles Page 4.11
voltage process input, calibration 9.3
accuracy ranges A.6 Set Lockout Menu 8.2
process input wiring 12.3–12.5 Setup Page 5.6
RTD input wiring 12.3–12.5 solenoid valve 5.4 W
thermocouple input wiring solid-state relay 5.4, 12.7 wait for event 4.3
12.3–12.5 SP High Limit 5.10, 6.3 warranty ii
Sensor, Analog Input x 5.8 SP Low Limit 5.9, 6.3 wet bulb 5.8
serial number, diagnostics 10.2 specifications A.6 wiring example 12.12
Set Lockout Menu map 8.2 Static Message 5.15 wiring, overview 12.1
Set Point static set point 3.1
Channel x, ramp or soak 4.13 step types 4.2–4.3 X, Y, Z
High Limit 5.10, 6.3 Autostart 4.2 zero-cross switching 6.6
Lockout 8.1 End 4.3 heater life 6.6
Low Limit 5.9, 6.3 Jump 4.3 noise generation (RFI) 6.6
set point, autotuning 3.4 Ramp Rate 4.2 sine wave 6.6
set point, beginning percentage 3.4 Ramp Time 4.2
set points, cooling dead band 3.5 Soak 4.3
set points, heating dead band 3.5 stop bit 3.9
set variable, see setpoint system errors 3.9
setting and changing password 8.2 System Menu 3.4, 5.7
setting lock levels 8.1 Systeme Internationale (SI) 5.1
Clear Locks 8.3
Factory Page 8.1 T
Operations 8.1 technical assistance ii
Password 8.2, 8.3 temperature scale (°F or °C) 5.1, 5.7
Profile Page 8.1 terminals A.6
Set Point 8.1 terminate profile 3.3
Setup Page 8.1 test menu map 10.1
settings 2.5 Test Outputs 10.1, 10.4
change 2.5 thermocouple 5.8, A.6
program 2.5 thermocouple compensator 9.2
set up 2.5 thermocouple input
setup steps 1.4 calibration 9.2
Setup, overview 5.1 wiring 12.2–12.4
customizing the Main Page 5.2 Time 4.13
parameter record 5.16 time, setting current 5.1
parameter setup order 5.1 transformer isolation 12.1
parameter table 5.7–5.15

F4
1A
1B
2A
2B
…Alarm2 Low SP_______

1
32 F
Adjusts Value 2
Back Next
i
List of Figures
Chapter 1 Chapter 11
Single-Channel Series F4 Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . .1.1a Front View Dimensions and Gap Dimension . . . .11.1a
Dual-Channel Series F4 Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . .1.1b Side and Top View and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . .11.1b
Sample Application: Environmental Testing . . . . . .1.2–1.3 Multiple Panel Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2a
Gasket Seated on the Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2b
Chapter 2 Retention Collar and Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . .11.3a
Series F4 Displays and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . .2.2 Tightening the Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.3b
Default Main Page Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3 Disengaging the Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . .11.3c
Series F4 Keys and Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4
How to Enter Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6 Chapter 12
The Information Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7 Isolation Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.1
Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
Chapter 3 Input 1, Thermocouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.3a
Sample Application: Running a Profile . . . . . . . . . .3.7 Input 1, RTD (2- or 3-Wire) 100 Ω Platinum . . . .12.3b
Input 1, 0 to 5VÎ, 1 to 5VÎ or 0 to 10VÎ Process12.3c
Chapter 4 Input 1, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Process . . . . .12.3d
Eight-Step Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2 Input 1, 0 to 50mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.3e
Sample Application: Programming a Profile . . . . . .4.8 Input 2 & 3, Thermocouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.4a
Profile Chart for Military Standard 810D Test . . . . .4.9a Input 2 & 3, RTD (2-wire) 100Ω Platinum . . . . . .12.4b
Graph of Military Standard 810D Test . . . . . . . . . .4.9b Input 2 & 3, RTD (3-wire) 100Ω Platinum . . . . . .12.4c
In. 2 & 3, 0 to 5VÎ, 1 to 5VÎ or 0 to 10VÎ Process12.5a
Chapter 5
Input 2 and 3, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Process 12.5b
Parameters on the Custom Main Page . . . . . . . . .5.2
Input 2 & 3, 0 to 50mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5c
Sample Application: Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4–5.5
Digital Inputs 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.6
Output x, Solid-state Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.7a
Chapter 6
Output x, Switched DC, Open Collector . . . . . . . .12.7b
Calibration Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2a
Output x, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5VÎ, 1 to 5VÎ
Filtered and Unfiltered Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . .6.2b
and 0 to 10VÎ (dc) Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.8a
Sensor Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3a
Retransmit Outputs 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.8b
On-off Control for Heating and Cooling . . . . . . . . .6.4a
Alarm Outputs 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.8c
Proportional Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4b
Digital Outputs 1 to 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.9a
Proportional Plus Integral Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5a
Digital Output, Open Collector Example . . . . . . .12.9b
PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5b
Digital Output, Switched DC Example . . . . . . . . .12.9c
Cooling Dead Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5c
EIA/TIA 485 and 232 Communications . . . . . . . .12.10a
Burst Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6
Termination for EIA-232 to -485 Converter . . . . .12.10b
Autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7
EIA/TIA-232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.10c
Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8
EIA-232 to EIA-485 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.11a
Alarm Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9a
GPIB Conversion to EIA-232 or EIA-485 . . . . . . .12.11b
Alarm Silencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9b
System Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.12
Boost Heat and Boost Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10a
Compressor Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10b
Control Lag Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11a
Cascade Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11b
Cascade Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11c
Watlow Series F4S/F Appendix ■ A.13

Series F4 Software Map
For ranges, defaults, Modbus numbers and other in-
formation about the parameters, refer to the
Parameter Tables in the chapters noted below.
Main Page see Chapter 2 Profiles Page Edit Profile

Profile x (1 to 40)
Input x (1 to 3) Error see Chapter 4 Insert Step x (1 to 256)
Alarm x (1 to 2) Condition Create Profile Insert Before Step x
Autotuning Ch x (1 to 2) Name Profile Step x Type (see below)
Parameter x (1 to 16) Step x (1 to 256) Type Edit Step
Current File Autostart Step x Type
Current Step Date Autostart
Input 2 Value Day Date
Set Point 1 Ramp Time Day
Set Point 2 Ramp Time
Step Type Wait For
Event Output Wait For
Target SP1 Time Event Output
Target SP2 Ch1 SP Time
Wait for Status Ch2 SP Ch1 SP
Time Remaining Ch1 PID Set x (1 to 5) Ch2 SP
Digital Ins Ch2 PID Set x (6 to 10) Ch1 PID Set x
Digital Outs Guarantee Soak1 (1 to 5)
% Power 1 Guarantee Soak2 Guarantee Soak1
% Power 2 Ch2 PID Set x
Ramp Rate (6 to 10)
Date
Time Wait For Guarantee Soak2
Event Output Ramp Rate
Go to Operations Rate
Go to Profiles Ch1 SP Wait For
Go to Setup Ch2 SP Event Output
Go to Factory Ch1 PID Set x (1 to 5) Rate
Guarantee Soak1 Ch1 SP
Ch2 SP
Operations Page Ch2 PID Set x (6 to 10)
Guarantee Soak2 Ch1 PID Set x
(1 to 5)
see Chapter 3 Soak Guarantee Soak1
Wait For Ch2 PID Set x
Autotune PID Event Output
Channel 1 Autotune (6 to 10)
Time Guarantee Soak2
Tune Off Ch1 PID Set x (1 to 5)
PID Set x (1 to 5) Soak
Guarantee Soak1
Channel 2 Autotune Ch2 PID Set x (6 to 10) Wait For
Guarantee Soak2 Event Output
Tune Off Time
PID Set x (6 to 10) Jump Ch1 PID Set x
Edit PID Jump to Profile x (1 (1 to 5)
PID Set Channel 1 to 40) Guarantee Soak1
PID Set x (1 to 5) Jump to Step x Ch2 PID Set x
PID Set Channel 2 Number Of Repeats (6 to 10)
PID Set x (6 to 10) End Guarantee Soak2
Proportional BandA Hold Jump
Integral A / ResetA Control Off Jump to Profile
Derivative A / RateA All Off x (1 to 40)
Dead Band A Idle Jump to Step x
Hysteresis A Number Of Repeats
Proportional Band B End
Integral B / ResetB Hold
Derivative B / RateB Control Off
Dead Band B All Off
Hysteresis B Idle
Alarm Set Points Delete Step
Alarm1 Done
Alarm1 Lo Deviation Delete Profile x (1 to 40)
Alarm1 Hi Deviation Re-Name Profile x (1 to 40)
Alarm2 Low SP
Alarm2 Low SP
Alarm2 High SP
A.16 ■ Appendix Watlow Series F4

Upper Display Lower Display
process information alarm, error, status information
and access to software
Factory Page
see Chapters 8, 9, 10
1A
F4 Output status Set Lockout
1B
Set Point
2A
Oper.Autotune PID
Cursor
Oper. Edit PID
Alarm status
2B
Oper. Alarm SP
1
Profile
Profile Light
2 Setup
Communications
run/hold status
Factory
status Change Password
Scroll up or down Clear Locks
Move up,
Diagnostic
i increase Model
Mfg Date
Move down, Serial #
Profile Key decrease Software #
run, hold, Revision
resume,
terminate
Information Key Back Next Inx (1 to 3)
profiles
toggles to tips and Out x (1A, 1B, 2A, or 2B)
definitions about the
chosen parameter
Retrans x (1 or 2)
In x (1 to 3) AtoD
Cycle Time CJC x (1 or 2) AtoD
Setup Page see Chapter 5 Process CJC x (1 or 2) Temp
Hi Power Limit Line Freq
System Lo Power Limit Test
Guar. Soak Band1 Alarm Output x (1 and 2) Test Outputs
Guar. Soak Band2 Name Display Test
Current Time Alarm Type Full Defaults
Current Date Alarm Source Calibration
PID Units Latching Calibrate Input x (1 to 3)
°F or °C Silencing Calibrate Output x (1A,
Show °F or °C Alarm Hysteresis 1B, 2A, or 2B)
Ch1 Autotune SP Alarm Sides Calibrate Rexmit x (1 or
Ch2 Autotune SP Alarm Logic 2)
Input 1 Fail Alarm Messages Restore In x (1 to 3) Cal
Input 2 Fail Retransmit Output x (1 and 2)
Open Loop Ch1 Retransmit Source
Open Loop Ch2 Analog Range
Power-Out Time Low Scale
Power-Out Action High Scale
Analog Input x (1 to 3) Scale Offset
Sensor Digital Output x (1 to 8)
Type Name
Decimal Function
Altitude Off
Units Event Output
Scale Low Boost Heat
Scale High Boost %Power
Choose Scaling Boost Delay Time
Ch2 Output Disable? Boost Cool
Enter In1 Temp Low Boost %Power
Enter In1 Temp High Boost Delay Time
SP Low Limit Compressor
SP High Limit Compressor On %Power
Calibration Offset Compressor Off %Power
✔ NOTE:
Filter Time Compressor On Delay
Compressor Off Delay Some parameters may not appear,
Error Latch
Cascade Communications (see Chapter 7) depending on the controller model
Digital Input x (1 to 4) Baud Rate and how it is configured. Some
Address menus may not appear if the
Name
Function Custom Main Page P x controller has already been installed
Condition (Parameter 1 to 16) in equipment and the manufacturer
Control Output x (1A, 1B, has locked out portions of the
2A, or 2B) software.
Function
Watlow Series F4 Appendix ■ A.17

How to Reach Us
Your Authorized Watlow Distributor:
United States (headquarters): Asia/Pacific:

Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company Watlow Australia Pty., Ltd.
12001 Lackland Road
23 Gladstone Park Drive,
St. Louis, Missouri USA 63146
Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 Australia
Telephone: +1 (314) 878-4600
Telephone: +61 (39) 335-6449
Fax: +1 (314) 878-6814
Fax: +61 (39) 330-3566
Europe: Watlow China, Inc.
Watlow GmbH 179, Zhong Shan Xi Road
Industriegebiet Heidig Hong Qiao Cointek Bldg, Fl. 4, Unit P
Lauchwasenstr. 1, Postfach 1165, Shanghai 200051 China
Kronau 76709 Germany Telephone: +86 (21) 6229-8917
Telephone: +49 7253-9400 0 Fax: +86 (21) 6228-4654
Fax: +49 7253-9400 44 Watlow Japan Ltd. K.K.
Watlow France S.A.R.L. Azabu Embassy Heights 106,
Immeuble Somag, 16 Rue Ampère, 1-11-12 Akasaka,
Cergy Pontoise CEDEX 95307 France Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-0052 Japan
Telephone: +33 (1) 3073-2425 Telephone: +81 (03) 5403-4688
Fax: +33 (1) 3073-2875 Fax: +81 (03) 5403-4646
Watlow Italy S.R.L. Watlow Korea Co., Ltd.
Via Meucci 14 Hanil Bldg., 3rd Floor
20094 Corsico MI 210-5 Yangje-Dong Seocho-Gu
Italy Seoul, 137-130 Korea
Telephone: +39 (02) 4588841 Telephone: +82 (2) 575-9804
Fax: +39 (02) 458-69954 Fax: +82 (2) 575-9831
Watlow Limited Watlow Malaysia Sdn Bhd
Robey Close, Linby Industrial Estate, 38B Jalan Tun Dr Awang
Linby Nottingham England, NG15 8AA 11900 Bayan Lepas
Telephone: +44 (0) 115 9640777 Penang Malaysia
Fax: +44 (0) 115 9640071 Telephone: +60 (4) 641-5977
Fax: +60 (4) 641-5979
Latin America:
Watlow Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Watlow de México Ayer Rajah Crescent
Av. Fundición #5, #03-23 Ayer Rajah Industrial Estate
Col. Parques Industriales, Singapore 139949
Querétaro, Qro. México CP-76130 Telephone: +65 773 9488
Telephone: +52 (442) 217-6235 Fax: +65 778 0323
Fax: +52 (442) 217-6403
Watlow Electric Taiwan
10F-1 No. 189
Chi-Shen 2nd Road,
Kaohsiung, Taiwan
Telephone: +886 (7) 288-5168
Fax: +886 (7) 288-5568

F4 Users Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

F4 Users Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

F4 Users Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series F4S/D

96mm x 96mm Ramping Controller (1/4 DIN)

1241 Bundy Boulevard, Winona, Minnesota USA

About This Manual

Introduction Installation and Wiring

Chapter 6: Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1

Chapter 7: Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1

Chapter 9: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1

Chapter 10: Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1

Watlow Series F4S/D Table of Contents ■ i

ii ■ Table of Contents Watlow Series F4S/D

Inputs and Outputs

4 Digital Inputs Back Next

Figure 1.1a — Single-Channel Series F4 (F4S_ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ ) Inputs and Outputs.

…Alarm2 Low SP_______

Figure 1.1b — Dual-Channel Series F4 (F4D_ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ ) Inputs and Outputs.

Watlow Series F4S/D Introduction ■ 1.1

• program the test as a ramping profile 1. Wire

Andy pressed the Profile Key and

selected the test profile. He monitored

See the Operations Chapter.

1.2 ■ Introduction Watlow Series F4S/D

2. Set up the F4 3. Customize and Name

4. Program the Profile

See the Profile Programming Chapter.

Watlow Series F4S/D Introduction ■ 1.3

3 Set up the controller to suit your basic

5 Set up serial communications. See Chapter 7, Communications.

6 Program a profile. See Chapter 4, Profile Programming.

7 Run the profile (or establish a set point

1.4 ■ Introduction Watlow Series F4S/D

Watlow Series F4S/D Keys, Displays and Navigation ■ 2.1

2.2 ■ Keys, Displays and Navigation Watlow Series F4S/D

Will appear if active Alarm 1 Condition

Will appear if active and Autotuning Ch 1

Will appear by default: Current File

Watlow Series F4S/D Keys, Displays and Navigation ■ 2.3

> Move Up/Increase 2A

, . < Move Down/Decrease 2B

Figure 2.4 — Series F4 Keys and Navigation.

2.4 ■ Keys, Displays and Navigation Watlow Series F4S/D

Watlow Series F4S/D Keys, Displays and Navigation ■ 2.5

1. Navigate Alarm Hysteresis:___

you want to Adjusts Value 2

2. Move right or left to choose the character to change.

Figure 2.6 — How to Enter Numbers and Names. (F4D shown)

2.6 ■ Keys, Displays and Navigation Watlow Series F4S/D

Toggle the Information Key F4

you need to know about and 1B

its functional definition. 2A

The scroll bar indicates

Figure 2.7 — The Information Key. (F4D shown)

Watlow Series F4S/D Keys, Displays and Navigation ■ 2.7

2.8 ■ Keys, Displays and Navigation Watlow Series F4S/D

Series F4S/D Operation

Watlow Series F4S/D Operations ■ 3.1

To Start/Run a Profile Start Profile:_______ .

3.2 ■ Operations Watlow Series F4S/D

To Resume a Profile on Hold Resume Profile:_____